JP2009183370A - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a slot machine allowing a player to acquire lots of game values in a special game state finishing when the total number of awarded game values reaches an upper limit. <P>SOLUTION: This slot machine finishes CB when the total putout number in the CB exceeds 119, and defines only a 15-piece small prize pattern and a 14-piece small prize pattern as small prize patterns, or winning objects, in the CB, wherein a net increase number becomes maximum when winning 15-piece small prize pattern 10 times and 14-piece small prize pattern once. When a player wins no replay winning combination in the CB, the player may win the 15-piece small prize pattern alone, however, when winning the replay winning combination, the player can select whether winning the 14-piece small prize pattern or the 15-piece small prize pattern, according to an operation procedure. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2009,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable.

  A slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of (usually three) reels having a plurality of types of symbols as identification information drawn on the outer periphery, and each reel has a start lever by a player. The rotation is started by the operation, and the rotation is stopped by the player operating the stop button provided corresponding to each reel. When all the reels stop rotating, a winning combination is generated when a predetermined combination of winning symbols is arranged on the winning line.

  In this type of slot machine, there is a special game state such as a big bonus that can acquire more medals (game value) than the normal game state by having a specific symbol such as “7” in the normal game state. The ones that can be generated are common. In addition, in recent years, there are cases in which a very large number of medals can be obtained in a special game state, resulting in a problem that the player's gambling feeling is unnecessarily increased.

  For this reason, an upper limit is set on the number of medals that can be paid out during the special gaming state, and the special gaming state is terminated when the number of medals paid out to the player during the special gaming state exceeds the upper limit. A slot machine has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2002-85646 A

  In the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, the special gaming state ends when the number of medals paid out to the player during the special gaming state exceeds the upper limit. There will be no change in the number of medals won, and the interest will be lost. For this reason, in the special game state, a plurality of small roles with different payout numbers can be won, and by adjusting the number of winning times of each small role, the small role is finally reached in a state where the maximum number of payouts is reached. It is conceivable that a large number of medals can be obtained by winning a prize as compared with the case where the number of winnings of the small role is not adjusted.

  However, in the case of the configuration as described above, the number of wins for a plurality of small roles in the special gaming state is not necessarily limited to the upper limit, and is necessary to adjust to the upper limit of the number of payouts. Even if a winning small role is won, it is necessary to dare to miss that small role, and the amount of medals used for the bet amount will be consumed unnecessarily. There is a problem of end.

  It is an object of the present invention to provide a slot machine that can acquire more gaming value in a special gaming state that ends when the total number of gaming values given reaches an upper limit.

In order to solve the above-described problem, a slot machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and a variable display device that can variably display a plurality of types of symbols each of which can be identified ( Reel 2L, 2C, 2R) is a slot machine in which a display result is derived and displayed to complete one game, and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived and displayed on the variable display device,
A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow a winning before the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is derived;
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
Derivation control means for performing control to cause the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) to derive a display result when the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated;
Regardless of the determination result of the pre-decision means (internal lottery), a special gaming state (advantageous to the player by always allowing the occurrence of a small role winning (small role) accompanied by the addition of the gaming value ( CB) special gaming state control means,
Game value number counting means for counting a total number of special grants (total payout in CB), which is the total number of game values (total payout of medals) given to the player after the start of the special game state (CB); ,
In the special gaming state (CB), when the total number of special grants (the total number of payouts in the CB) exceeds a specified value M (where M is an integer of 1 or more) (149 cards), the special gaming state (CB) is determined. A special game state ending means for ending,
With
In the special gaming state (CB), a game can be started by setting the number of bets using the gaming value a (where a is an integer equal to or greater than 1), and the gaming value b (However, b is 1 or more and is an integer smaller than M) The first type of small role winning (15 small roles) and game value c (where c is different from b and is 1 or more) And a second kind of small role winning (14 small roles) with a grant of an integer less than M) can be generated,
The number of occurrences of the first type of small winnings (15 small winnings) and the second type of small winnings (when the special grant total (total payout in CB) exceeds the prescribed value M) The number of bets in the special game state (CB) and the special game state (CB) when the special game state (CB) is finished and the special game state (CB). The specified value M and the game values a, b, and c are respectively set so that the net increase (net increase number), which is the difference from the total number of game values used for setting, is different (M: 149). A: 1, b: 15, c: 14),
The pre-determining means (internal lottery) determines whether or not to allow the occurrence of a special prize (re-playing part) different from the small part prize (small part) in the special gaming state (CB),
The derivation control means includes
Regardless of the operation procedure of the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) when it is not determined to allow the occurrence of the special winning (re-playing combination) in the special gaming state (CB), The winning display result corresponding to the first type of small winning combination (15 small winning combinations) can be derived to the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) and the second type small winning combination ( The winning display result corresponding to 14 small roles) is controlled so that the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) is not derived,
When it is determined to allow the occurrence of the special prize (re-playing combination) in the special gaming state (CB), the first operation procedure (stops in the order of right, middle, left, and right, When the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated in the operation procedure for listening to the bell with the middle reel, it corresponds to the first type small winning combination (15 small winnings). A control for deriving the winning display result to the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), a second operation procedure different from the first operation procedure (stopping in the order of right, middle and left; and When the operation of the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is performed in the operation procedure for listening to the replay with the right and middle reels, the second type of small winning combination (14 small winnings) is obtained. The corresponding winning display result is displayed on the variable display device ( Lumpur 2L, 2C, is characterized by performing control to derived 2R).
According to this feature, the special gaming state according to the combination of the number of occurrences of the first type of small part winning when the total number of special grants exceeds the prescribed value M and the number of occurrences of the second type of small part winning. Because the number of net increases is different, the maximum number of net increases in the special gaming state can be obtained by adjusting the number of occurrences of the first type of small part winning and the number of occurrences of the second type of small part winning. It becomes. Then, only when it is determined that the occurrence of the special prize is permitted, the second type of small part prize can be generated, and when it is determined that the occurrence of the special prize is permitted, the derivation operation is performed. It is possible to select whether to generate the first type of small part winning or the second type of small part winning according to the operation procedure of the means, and the net increase is maximized in the special gaming state. Even if it is determined that the special prize is allowed to be generated in the situation where the second type of small part prize has already been generated, the first type of small part prize can be generated. Therefore, in the special gaming state that ends when the total number of special grants exceeds the specified value M, even if the total number of special grants is adjusted by the player's technical intervention, the game value is consumed wastefully by removing the small role prize. No, it is possible to acquire a maximum number of net increase in special game state.
Note that the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or setting a maximum bet number. good. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to a plurality of game states.
Further, the first type of small winning combination may be a small winning combination that is accompanied by a game value b, and may be a plurality of small winning combinations having different winning display results. Similarly, the second type of small winning combination may be a small winning combination with a game value c, and may be a plurality of small winning combinations having different winning display results.
Further, in the special gaming state, the first type of small role winning with the game value b and the second type of small role winning with the game value c are generated as the small role winning. Is possible that only the first type of small part winning and the second type of small part winning can be generated, or that the first type of small part winning is possible. In addition to winning and the second type of small role winning, the special winning may be generated.

A slot machine according to claim 2 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 1,
The predetermined value M and the game values a, b, and c are such that the net increase is maximized on condition that the number of occurrences of the second type of small winning combination (14 small winning combinations) is not zero. (M: 150, a: 1, b: 15, c: 14)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in order to maximize the net increase in the special gaming state, it is necessary to generate both the first type of small part winning and the second type of small part winning, and the number of times of both winnings Therefore, the interest in the special gaming state can be enhanced.

A slot machine according to claim 3 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 1,
The specified value M and the gaming values a, b, and c are such that the net increase is maximized on the condition that the number of occurrences of the second type of small winning combination (14 small winnings) is zero. (M: 149, a: 1, b: 15, c: 14)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in order to maximize the net increase in the special gaming state, it is necessary to generate only the first type of small part winning, so the second type of small part winning is allowed. Even when the effect is determined, since it is necessary to always generate the first type of small role winning by the technical intervention of the player, the interest in the special gaming state can be enhanced.

A slot machine according to claim 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
In the special gaming state (CB), when the pre-determining means (internal lottery) determines that the special winning (re-playing combination) is allowed to occur, the special winning (re-playing combination) is generated. Special winning notification means (replay winning notification) to notify that it has been determined to allow,
The special winning notification means does not satisfy the specific notification condition in the special gaming state (CB) in which a specific notification condition (CB in which the combination of CBs is aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5) is satisfied. It is informed that it has been determined that the special winning (re-playing combination) is allowed to be generated at a higher rate than the special gaming state (CB in which the combination of CBs has shifted along the winning lines L1 to L3). It is said.
According to this feature, the special game state in which the specific notification condition is satisfied can increase the net increase in the special game state more than the special game state in which the specific notification condition is not satisfied. .

A slot machine according to claim 5 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
A game control board (game control board 40) equipped with game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the game;
A gaming electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) including at least one of a first electronic component that outputs a signal related to the progress of the game and a second electronic component that receives a signal related to the progress of the game;
The gaming electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) is detachable by connecting the connectors (board side connector 620a and cable side connector 610a / board side connector 621a and cable side connector 611a / board side connector 622g and cable side connector 612g). ) And the game control board (game control board 40) for electrically connecting the game electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) and the game control board (game control board 40). Wiring (cables 600a, 601g);
The wiring and connectors (board side connector 621a, cable side connector 611a / board side connector 622g, and cable side connector 612g) are connected to each other, and the gaming electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) and the game control board (game control board) 40) a relay board (operation part relay board 110) for relaying input / output of signals to / from,
The connection between the connectors on the wiring between the game electronic component (the inserted medal sensor 31) and the game control board (game control board 40) is broken, and the release restriction part related to the connection between the connectors is destroyed. Unless otherwise, electronic component connection release restriction means (connector restriction member) that forms a connection release restriction state that makes the release impossible,
With
The electronic component connection release regulating means is
Connector (board side connector 620a and cable side connector 610a / board side connector 621a and cable) of the wiring (cable 600a) between the game control board (game control board 40) and the relay board (operation unit relay board 110) First electronic component connection release restricting means (connector restricting member) that disables the connection between the side connectors 611a),
Connection between the wiring board (cable 601g) and the connector (board side connector 622g and cable side connector 612g) between the relay board (operation unit relay board 110) and the game electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) is performed. A second electronic component connection release restricting means (connector restricting member) that makes the release impossible;
It is characterized by including.
According to this feature, not only the wiring connector between the game control board and the relay board, but also the release of the connection between the wiring connector between the relay board and the gaming electronic component is regulated, The release of the connection between all the connectors of the wiring provided between the game electronic component and the game control board is restricted. As a result, it is difficult to perform any illegal act such as replacing any connector with a connector such as an unauthorized driving tool and causing the game control board to input / output an illegal signal related to the progress of the game. A slot machine that is set in a state where it is possible to easily obtain privilege acquisition information for obtaining a privilege using a driving tool, or a slot machine that is set in a state where a special prize is won, such as when a game shop starts business. It is possible to effectively prevent illegal business such as providing to customers.
In addition, since the connection release restriction state is formed by the electronic component connection release restriction means, in order to release the connection between the connectors, the release restriction part must be destroyed, and after this, the connection is released again. Since it becomes extremely difficult to form a connection release restriction state and it takes time and effort, it is possible to more effectively suppress the fraud.
One or more relay boards may be connected between one gaming electronic component and the game control board. When a plurality of relay boards are connected, the electronic component connection release restriction Preferably, the means includes third electronic component connection release restriction means that makes it impossible to release connection between the connectors of the wiring between one relay board and another relay board. The release of the connection between all the connectors of the wiring provided between the game electronic component and the game control board is regulated.

  Examples of the present invention will be described below.

  Embodiment 1 of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is rotatable to a housing 1a having an open front surface and a side end of the housing 1a. The front door 1b is pivotally supported.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, reels 2L, 2C and 2R (hereinafter referred to as a left reel, a middle reel and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. As shown in FIG. 1, a see-through window 3 in which three consecutive symbols out of symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are provided on the front door 1b, as shown in FIG. It is arranged so that it can be seen from.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, “black 7”, “net 7 (shaded 7 in the figure)”, “white 7”, “replay”, “watermelon”, There are 21 types of symbols that can be distinguished from each other such as “black cherry”, “net cherry (shaded cherry in the figure)”, “white cherry”, “bell”, and “orange” in a predetermined order. ing. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously formed in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back side. , Is provided. The reel LED 55 includes nine LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently.

  A display area 51a of a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a normally white liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and a transmissive region 51b corresponding to the see-through window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side through the see-through window 3. Further, a backlight (not shown) for irradiating the display area 51a from behind is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a excluding the transmissive area 51b, and the back surface further has a concealing member for concealing the inside. (Not shown) is provided.

  On the front side (front side in FIG. 1) of the liquid crystal display 51, an instruction (for example, touch operation) from the player to the display surface is detected, and the position (for example, the position where the touch operation is performed) is specified. Light-emitting devices 56a and 56b and light-receiving devices 57a and 57b that constitute a touch panel for the above-described purpose are installed. The light emitting devices 56a and 56b include a plurality of infrared light emitting elements (for example, LEDs). The light receiving devices 57a and 57b include a plurality of infrared light receiving elements (for example, phototransistors).

  The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed in pairs in the horizontal direction across the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed so that infrared rays radiated from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56a can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57a. Similarly, the light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed in pairs in the vertical direction across the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed so that infrared rays emitted from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56b can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57b.

  In the present embodiment, infrared grids are formed along the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 by emitting infrared rays from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. When a touch operation is performed on the display surface by the player, the light receiving devices 57a and 57b detect the shielding of infrared rays and output a signal for specifying the position where the detected light receiving element is arranged. To the touch panel controller 99 described later. The touch panel controller 99 can specify the position where the touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and the touch panel is formed by these. Yes.

  The light emitting devices 56 a and 56 b constituting the touch panel are installed on the left side and the lower side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51, and the light receiving devices 57 a and 57 b are installed on the right side and the upper side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The touch panel can detect a touch operation in an area surrounded by the light emitting devices 56a and 56b and the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and can specify a position where the touch operation is performed.

  On the front door 1b, a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a game value owned by the player) are used for one medal. One bet switch 5 operated when setting the bet number, and using a credit, the maximum bet number among the prescribed bet numbers determined according to the gaming state within the range (this embodiment will be described later) Normal gaming state, 3 in RT (1) to (4), 1 in RB and CT described later, MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting, setting medal and bet number stored as credit The settlement switch 10 that is operated when the medals used in the settlement are settled (the medals used for setting credits and bets are returned), and the start switch that is operated when the game is started. Ji 7, reel 2L, 2C, stop switch 8L is operated to stop each rotation of the 2R, 8C, 8R, but are provided operable by the player.

  The front door 1b displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in BB and CB, which will be described later, and an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs. A game auxiliary display 12 and a payout display 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning are provided.

  Further, on the front door 1b, a 1BETLED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set to 1 by lighting, a 2BETLED 15 that notifies that the bet number is set to 2, and 3 bets are set. 3BET LED 16 to notify when lit, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted is lit, start valid LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (previous Waiting state LED 19 for informing that it is in the state of waiting for the start of reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the game, during replay informing that it is in the replay game described later An LED 20 is provided.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the setting operation of the betting number by operating the one-sheet BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. Inside the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R for informing that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective by lighting (FIG. 4).

  Inside the front door 1b, there is a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, while changing a set value and confirming a set value described later. A set value display 24 for displaying the set value at that time, and a flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 on the side of a hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) described later provided in the housing 1a or A medal selector having a insertion medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal that is inserted from the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the medal insertion unit 4 and selectively flows to the hopper tank 34a side to selectively switch to one of the medal payout exits 9 side. The door opening detection switch 25 (refer FIG. 4) which detects the open state of the front door 1b is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a reel sensor 33L that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, as shown in FIG. , 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), an external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4, and a hopper tank 34a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals from the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  On the front surface of the power supply box 100 is a stop switch for selecting whether to enable / disable a stop function for controlling the stop state at the end of BB, which will be described later (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed). 36a, automatic checkout for selecting whether the automatic checkout function is effective / invalid for controlling automatic checkout processing (processing for adjusting (returning) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of BB described later The switch 36b functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to the setting change mode at the time of startup, and as a reset switch for canceling the error state and the stop state in the normal state. In the setting change mode, the winning probability of the internal lottery described later Reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value of (development rate), power ON / OFF Power switch 39 is provided which is operated when that.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or the bet number is set using credits. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) become effective, and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In the present embodiment, as a specified number of bets, three are determined in the normal gaming state described later, RT (1) to (4), and one is determined in RB and CT described later. . When medals are inserted beyond the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the middle of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the symbols arranged in the upper row of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are straddled. The winning line L2, the winning line L3, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the upper side of the reel 2R, that is set across the symbols arranged in the lower stage of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. There are five types of winning lines L4 set across straddling symbols: the winning line L4, the upper reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, the lower reel 2R; It is defined as.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a combination) is placed on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with a medal payout is available on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals will be awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game, and when the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is awarded. It will be. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply. The game control board 40 and the game control board 40 It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101. Yes.

  On the game control board 40, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, the door opening detection switch 25, The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Are connected, and the detection signals of these connected switches are inputted.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 10, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 controls the game, and random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 16383 in this embodiment). A random number generation circuit 42 that generates a random number, a sampling circuit 43 that acquires a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit that detects a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 101 44, a motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of the flow path switching solenoid 30, and a drive control of various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40 LED drive circuit 47 for performing power supply, monitoring the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 When detecting a voltage drop, the power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41, the main CPU 41a when the power is turned on or when the initialization command from the main CPU 41a is not inputted A reset circuit 49 for giving a reset signal to the player, disconnection for monitoring an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 A monitoring IC 50 and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The main CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  Further, the main control unit 41 is supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 41c is held while the backup power is being supplied.

  The main CPU 41a executes basic processing that shifts in stages according to the detection state of various switches connected to the game control board 40. Further, the main CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In the present embodiment, the power interruption interrupt process is executed in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 48. Further, the main CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment).

  The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to the light receiving devices 57a and 57b constituting the touch panel described above, and detection signals of the connected light receiving devices 57a and 57b are input to the touch panel controller 99.

  Electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), a rendering effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 described above are connected to the rendering control board 90, which is disposed on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. These electric components are driven based on control by a sub-control unit 91 (described later) mounted on the effect control board 90. The effect control board 90 is connected to the light emitting devices 56a and 56b constituting the touch panel described above, and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are based on control by a touch panel controller 99 described later mounted on the effect control board 90. To be driven.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and a microcomputer provided with an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 that performs display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an LED driving circuit 93 that performs drive control of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, Supplied to a reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not inputted for a certain period of time, a clock device 97 that outputs time information including date information and time information, and a slot machine 1 The power supply voltage is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, this is indicated Processing for identifying the position where the touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on the signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98 that outputs the pressure drop signal to the sub-control unit 91, and the light receiving devices 56b and 57b. The sub CPU 91a receives commands sent from the game control board 40 and output information from the touch panel controller 99, and performs various controls for performing effects. And each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90 is controlled directly or indirectly.

  Similar to the main CPU 41a, the sub CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). The sub CPU 91a acquires a command from the main control unit 41 based on an input of a strobe (INT) signal output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, and performs a command reception interrupt process for storing the command in the reception buffer. Execute. In addition, the sub CPU 91a generates an interrupt at regular intervals and executes a timer interrupt process. Further, the sub CPU 91a executes a power interruption interrupt process according to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, various boards such as the game control board 40 provided with the main control unit 41 for controlling the game are mounted, and these boards are shown in FIG. As described above, electronic components such as switches that can be operated by a player are connected via a cable.

  As described above, on the game control board 40, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the insertion medal sensor 31, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and the reel sensor 33L. 33C, 33R, a hopper motor 34b, a payout sensor 34c, and an effect control board 90 are connected.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R, and the inserted medal sensor 31 are played via the operation unit relay board 110. The reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected to the game control board 40 via the reel relay board 120, and the hopper motor 34b and the payout sensor 34c are connected to the control board 40 by wiring. The game control board 40 is connected to the game via the power supply board 101, and the effect control board 90 is connected to the game control board 40 via the effect relay board 80.

  The operation unit relay board 110, the reel relay board 120, the power supply board 101, and the effect control board 90 are provided with wiring patterns (not shown) for connecting the game control board 40 and each electronic component. The detection signal output from the component to the game control board 40 or the power or signal supplied (input) from the game control board 40 can be relayed.

  In this way, the various electronic components and the game control board 40 are connected to each other via the relay boards 110, 120, 100, and 80 attached to predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1 (the casing 1a in this embodiment). As a result, the wiring from the game control board 40 to a plurality of electronic components individually arranged at predetermined positions on the main body of the slot machine 1 is facilitated, and the connector connection portion is always connected to the relay board or the game control board 40. As a result, the connector connecting portion of each electronic component is fixed, so that it is possible to prevent a connector connecting portion from being searched for during wiring connection work or to make a mistake in the type of wiring to be connected.

  Single BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, insertion medal sensor 31, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R, hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c Is an electronic component that inputs and outputs signals related to the progress of the game to and from the game control board 40. The signal related to the progress of the game is, for example, an operation for setting the number of bets to make the game startable, an operation for starting the game, or an operation for deriving the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Such as signals output to the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game, detection of inserted medals, detection of the reference position of the reels, detection of the payout medals, etc., output from the game electronic components in accordance with the progress of the game And a signal input to the game control board 40, a drive signal for driving the reels 2L, 2C, 2R according to the detection of the start operation, and a hopper for paying out medals when a winning occurs. A signal that is output from the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game and that is input to the game electronic component.

  These gaming electronic components are a first electronic component that outputs a signal to the game control board 40 as the game progresses, and a second that receives a signal from the game control board 40 as the game progresses. And electronic components.

  The gaming electronic component and the board are connected via a cable, and the cable connecting the gaming electronic component and the board is designed to facilitate assembly work and wiring work at the time of manufacturing the slot machine. Separation is possible by releasing the connection. These gaming electronic components are basically electronic components that are continuously used in common with multiple models, and there are few opportunities to remove them from the main unit unless a failure occurs. It is fixed in place. On the other hand, the game control board 40, the effect control board 90, and the like need to be replaced when changing the model, and are removed from the main body at that time. That is, when removing the game control board 40, it is necessary to release the connection between the game electronic component and the effect control board 90, so the cable and the board that connect these boards and the board to the game electronic component are: The cable side connector provided at the end of the cable is electrically connected to the board side connector electrically connected to the wiring pattern of the board, and the cable side connector is removed from the board side connector. By releasing the connection, the game control board 40 can be easily removed from the main body and replaced.

  However, when the slot machine is shipped from the manufacturer to the game store in such a state that the wiring connection between the game control board 40 and the game electronic component can be easily released by removing the connector, for example, in a game store, the board side connector In this case, the cable-side connector can be easily removed from the board-side connector, and the cable-side connector connected to an unauthorized tool such as a so-called driving tool can be easily connected to the board-side connector.

  The driving instrument is, for example, operating various switches and the like provided in the slot machine by causing the game control board 40 to input / output a signal that is a pseudo reproduction of the signal input / output to / from the game control board 40 from the game electronic component. It is possible to automatically advance the game without playing. Therefore, for example, in a game store or the like, the regular connector connected to the board-side connector provided on the game control board 40 is removed, and an unauthorized connector connected to the driving tool is connected instead. By inputting / outputting signals to / from the game control board 40 at an appropriate timing to automatically advance the game, for example, it is possible to easily set a state where a special role is won. Therefore, a slot machine set in such a state that a special role is won using such an illegal driving tool, and BB (1) having higher advantage among CB and BB (1) described later is won. Slot machine set to a state where there is a high possibility of being present (in this embodiment, BB (1) may be won when the combination of watermelons or chances are aligned on the winning lines L4 and L5 as will be described later. This suggests that BB (1) can be set to a state where there is a high possibility that the player has won. If played, the fairness of the game may be impaired.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable side of the cable 600a. Connection between the connector 611a and the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110, and connection between the board-side connector 622q of the operation part relay board 110 and the cable-side connector 612q of the cable 601q, the connection between these connectors is released. It is controlled by the member.

  The connector restricting member is not removable unless the release restricting portion is destroyed. In order to release the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, the release restricting portion must be destroyed. As a result, when even one connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the trace remains and it is extremely difficult to erase the trace. Unauthorized sales can be more effectively suppressed.

  In this embodiment, there is only one relay board between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31. However, when a plurality of relay boards are used, all the connector connections existing between them are disconnected. It is preferable to restrict the removal, and in this way, it becomes difficult to release the connection of any connector between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, so that the illegal business is more effective. Can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, the first electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 33L, 33C, 33R, and 35 that input signals to the game control board 40 according to the progress of the game and the progress of the game. Of the second electronic components 32L, 32C, 32R, 34 for which signals are output from the game control board 40 in response to this, a connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40. The release of connection between connectors is regulated. That is, the inserted medal sensor 31 which cannot advance the game without the signal (the bet number cannot be set and the game cannot be started unless the signal from the inserted medal sensor 31 is input) and the game control. The connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection with the board 40 to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors, and the connection between the connectors is released between the other electronic components and the game control board 40 to drive the instrument. Even if it is replaced with a connector, it will be impossible to automatically advance the game automatically, so that it is possible to prevent fraud with the minimum restrictions, and to disconnect these connectors The number of parts can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, only the connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 is provided with a connector restricting member to restrict the connection between the connectors, but the start switch 7 and the game control board 40 are not connected. The same effect can be obtained even if a connector restricting member is provided only for connector connection between the connector and the release of the connection between the connectors is restricted. Further, if the reel is not configured to stop until the reel stop operation is performed after the start of the reel rotation as in the present embodiment, between the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R and the game control board 40. The same effect can be obtained even if the connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors.

  In this embodiment, the door opening detection switch 25 is connected to the game control board 40 via a cable. However, any of the connectors of the cable provided between the door opening detection switch 25 and the game control board 40 may be used. When the connection at that connector is released, when the front door 1b is opened, the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board cannot detect that fact, and the door opening notification or door opening is detected. Since the signal is not output, the discovery may be delayed even if the front door 1b is opened and an illegal act is performed.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable of the cable 600a. For the connection between the side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110, and the connection between the board side connector 622q of the operation part relay board 110 and the cable side connector 612q of the cable 601q, the connection between these connectors is released. It is regulated by a connector regulating member.

  This makes it difficult to release the connection between any of the connectors between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, so that the front door 1b is not notified that the front door 1b has been opened. It is possible to effectively prevent the door 1b from being opened.

  Further, as described above, the connector restricting member is not removable unless the release restricting portion is destroyed, and in order to release the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, the release restricting member When the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25 is released, the trace remains and the trace is extremely deleted. Since it is difficult, it can suppress more effectively that front door 1b will be opened in the state where the information that front door 1b was opened is not performed.

  In this embodiment, there is only one relay board between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25. However, when a plurality of relay boards are used, all the connector connections existing between them are connected. It is preferable to restrict the removal, and in this way, it becomes difficult to release the connection of any connector between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, so the front door 1b is opened. It is possible to more effectively prevent the front door 1b from being opened in a state in which the notification of being made is not made.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of signal lines connecting the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components for inputting / outputting signals necessary for the progress of the game and the door opening detection switch 25 are connected to the game control board 40. Since it is connected to the operation unit relay board 110 with one cable 600a, the connector connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a, that is, the connection of only one connector is released. By restricting, it becomes possible to restrict the release of the connection between the plurality of signal lines, and it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of parts for restricting the release of the connector connection, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  When a plurality of signal lines for connecting the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components for inputting / outputting signals necessary for the progress of the game and the door opening detection switch 25 are connected via a plurality of cables. However, in order to regulate the release of these connector connections by arranging the board side connectors close to each other and restricting the release of the connection between the plurality of board side connectors and the plurality of cable side connectors with one component. It is not necessary to prepare a plurality of parts, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the game control board 40 is attached to the main body of the slot machine in a state accommodated in the board case, and the upper case sealing piece and the lower case sealing piece constituting the board case are fixed, If the sealing piece is not destroyed, the board case is opened, and access to the stored game control board 40 is disabled, making it difficult to cheat the game control board 40. However, since the sealing piece is exposed to the outside as it is, it is relatively easy to break the sealing piece and open the substrate case, and the sealing piece is broken and accommodated in the substrate case. There is a possibility that the game control board 40 may be cheated, and countermeasures against these cheating are still insufficient.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, a covering member that covers the sealing piece of the substrate case is attached. As a result, the sealing piece of the substrate case is covered with the covering member, and it becomes impossible to directly access the sealing piece. If the covering member is not removed, the sealing piece cannot be destroyed. It would be very difficult to destroy and open the upper case and the lower case to take out the game control board 40, so that illegal actions such as replacing the game control board 40 with an illegal board are effective. Can be prevented.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment outputs an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence state, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 6, these external output signals are output from the game control board 40 under the control of the main CPU 41a, and the information output terminal board 1010 of the game store (hall) in which the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed. Via a hall computer such as a hall computer.

  From the game control board 40 to the external output board 1000, a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals given to the player due to the occurrence of a winning, a gaming state Is an RB signal indicating that RB is described later, a BB signal indicating that the gaming state is BB, which will be described later, a CT signal indicating that the gaming state is during the challenge time, and a gaming state indicating that the gaming bonus is in progress A CB medium signal indicating that the front door 1b is open, a setting change signal indicating that the front door 1b is in a setting change mode, which will be described later, a throwing error signal indicating an abnormality of the medal selector, and the hopper unit 34 A payout error signal indicating the abnormality is output.

  In this embodiment, an error output signal line that may be expanded in the future is connected between the game control board 40 and the external output board 1000.

  The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit 1001, a parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002, a terminal for each output signal, and a connector 1003 to be electrically connected to the circuit of the information providing terminal board 1010. ing.

  Of the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, CT signal, and CB signal are directly provided as pulse signals via the relay circuit 1001. It is output to the terminal board 1010.

  On the other hand, a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a (preliminary signal) are security signals that are serial signals that can be individually identified by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002. And output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  The medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, CT signal, and CB signal output from the external output board 1000 are output to the hall device via the information providing terminal board 1010. On the other hand, the security signal output from the external output board 1000 is again converted into a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a spare signal at the information providing terminal board 1010 and output to the hall device. Will be.

  The external output signal includes a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a dispensing error signal, but these door opening signal, setting changing signal, closing error signal, and dispensing error signal are not frequently output signals. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an external output terminal for each of these signals.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, the external output signal output from the game control board 40 as described above is output to the hall device via the external output board 1000, and the door opening signal and setting among these external output signals are set. The change signal, input error signal, and payout error signal are converted into security signals, which are serial signals that can be individually identified, by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000, and output to the outside. Thus, it is possible to output the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the dispensing error signal from one terminal, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary.

  In addition, even if there is a spare signal line that is not currently used but may be used in the future, individual signals can be identified with a single terminal, including the signal output from the spare signal line. It is possible to output as much as possible, and a spare signal line terminal that is not used does not become an empty terminal.

  In this embodiment, the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the making error signal, and the paying error signal are serially identifiable by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000. It is converted to a security signal, which is a signal, and output to the outside. For example, any one of a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a paying error signal is output by an AND circuit or the like. In such a case, an error signal may be output to the outside through a single terminal. Even in this case, either an error has occurred in the external device, the door is open, or the setting is being changed. Therefore, it is possible to specify that the terminal is being generated, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary. In this case, since a plurality of signals can be output to the outside with one terminal without being converted into a serial signal, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a uses a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals (credits) used to set the wager number as an external output signal as described above in order to manage sales with a hall computer. Control is performed to output a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals (credits) given to the player as a result of winning to an external device as an external output signal.

  As an output method of the medal IN signal, a method of outputting every time the bet number is set is conceivable. In this method, when the bet number is canceled after the bet number is set, the medal IN signal is output. There is a problem that it is necessary to perform control to cancel the output. In addition, when it is possible to set the bet number using both medals and credits, the bet number is set using a program that outputs a medal IN signal and credits when the medals are inserted and the bet number is set. It is necessary to provide a program that outputs the medal IN signal when set.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 7A, the main CPU 41a of the present embodiment, when the operation of the start switch 7 is effectively detected, that is, when the number of bets used in the game is determined, The medal IN signals for the set number of bets are collectively output.

  Specifically, when a predetermined number of bets has not yet been set and the insertion of a medal is detected in a state where the insertion of a medal is permitted, every time one insertion of the medal is detected by the insertion medal sensor 31. One bet is added. When the specified number of bets is set, the operation of the start switch 7 is validated. Thereafter, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, that is, when the bet number used in the game is determined, the main CPU 41a collectively outputs the medal IN signals for the set bet number. In addition, when the bet amount is set by using credit for all or a part of the specified number of bets, the main CPU 41a is set when the specified number of bets is set and the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. The medals IN signals for the number of bets set to are collectively output.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the game is started, that is, when the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is determined, the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is collectively collected from the outside. It is possible to omit the control for canceling the outputted medal IN signal in accordance with the cancellation of the bet number, and the control related to the output of the medal IN signal can be simplified.

  In addition, since the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the bet number is collectively output when the number of medals used for setting the bet number is determined, the bet number is set by inserting the medals. Sometimes it is not necessary to separately provide a program that outputs a medal IN signal and a program that outputs a medal IN signal when a bet is set using credits, and a program that outputs a medal IN signal is shared. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the program capacity for outputting the medal IN signal.

  On the other hand, as an output method of the medal OUT signal, a method of outputting the medal OUT signals collectively according to the number of medals paid out at the start of medal payout or a method of outputting the medal OUT signals collectively at the end of the medal payout can be considered. In the former case, when a medal out error occurs while the medal is being paid out and the medal payout is interrupted, the number of medals indicated by the medal OUT signal and the number of medals actually paid out are changed. There is a problem that an error occurs, and the external device cannot specify the exact payout number at that time. In the latter case, after the medal payout is completed, the next game cannot be started until the output of the medal OUT signal is completed.

  Therefore, the main CPU 41a of the present embodiment shows that when a medal is paid out by paying out a physical medal from the hopper unit 34, a medal OUT indicating that one medal is awarded every time a medal is paid out. Output a signal.

  More specifically, when a winning with a medal payout occurs and is added to the credit, each time 1 is added to the credit, the main CPU 41a outputs a 1-pulse medal OUT signal indicating the payout of one medal. When a medal is paid out from the hopper unit 34, as shown in FIG. 7B, one medal is paid out and the main CPU 41a indicates the payout of one medal every time it is detected by the payout sensor 34c. A 1-pulse medal OUT signal is output. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 7B, during the medal payout, it is determined that a predetermined payout medal-free time has elapsed since the last medal payout was detected, or the medals are continuous. If the detection time exceeds a predetermined medal clogging time and is determined to be a medal clogging, and if the payout operation is stopped due to a payout error state, the number of sheets actually paid out is stopped before the payout operation is stopped. Only the medal OUT signal is output, the payout error is canceled, the remaining payout is resumed, the remaining medal is paid out, and the medal OUT signal accompanying the payout of the remaining medals is output each time it is detected by the payout sensor 34c. Will be. Then, when the payout of the last medal is detected and the output of the medal OUT signal is completed, the control of one game is finished, and the insertion of the medal is permitted at this time.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a medal is paid out by paying out a physical medal from the hopper unit 34, a medal OUT signal indicating that one medal is awarded every time one medal is paid out. Even if the medal is out and the payout error occurs and the payout of the medal is interrupted, the number of medals indicated by the medal OUT signal and the actual payout Since the number of medals coined out matches, the number of medals paid out can be accurately output to the outside.

  Also, in the method of outputting the medals OUT signal collectively according to the number of medals paid out at the start of medal payout or the method of outputting the medals OUT signal collectively at the end of the medal payout, more medals are forced than the number of medals originally paid out. Medal indicating that one medal was awarded each time a medal is paid out, although it is difficult to detect it with an external device such as a hall computer when an illegal act of paying out is performed. By outputting a signal, it becomes possible to accurately and accurately grasp the number of medals paid out by winning a small role on an external device in real time. It becomes possible to detect, and such illegal acts can be effectively prevented.

  In addition, every time a medal is paid out, a medal OUT signal indicating that one medal has been awarded is output, so that the bet number setting operation is permitted immediately after the medal payout is completed. Therefore, since the next game can be started, the game can proceed smoothly.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are, for example, hybrid type stepping motors, and include a stator 32b and a rotor 32a facing the stator 32b. The rotor 32a has a number of gear-shaped salient poles (not shown), and permanent magnets magnetized in the same direction as the rotation shaft are incorporated therein. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R receive a pulse signal output from the motor drive circuit 45 based on the control of the main CPU 41a, and the respective excitation phases φ1 to φ4 of the stator 32b are excited according to a predetermined procedure. Each time a pulse is received, the rotor 32a is rotated by a predetermined angle (one step).

  FIG. 9A is a timing chart showing a control method when starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. In the figure, φ1 to φ4 indicate each excitation phase, “ON” indicates an excitation state, and “OFF” indicates a demagnetization state. When starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, the main CPU 41a starts excitation in the rotational direction by a 1-2 phase excitation method, which will be described later, starting from the state where only the stop phase is excited. Specifically, for example, when the stop phase is (φ3), φ1 to φ4 are changed in the order of (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1). Excited alternately in 2 phase, 1 phase and 2 phase.

  If the excitation is started with a phase different from the stop phase as a starting point, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is suddenly attracted to the excitation phase, and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation. In the present embodiment, since the excitation is started from the stop phase as a starting point, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a starts smoothly.

  FIG. 9B is a timing chart showing a control method during rotation and stop of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R.

  First, during the rotation, that is, until the condition for stopping the reel is satisfied, the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. For example, a pulse signal indicating that φ1 to φ4 is excited is turned ON / OFF at the timing shown in FIG. 9B, and (φ4, φ1), (φ1), (φ1,. (φ2), (φ2), (φ2, φ3), (φ3), (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1)... in this order, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated by exciting the Φ1 to Φ4 alternately for each phase and rotating the rotor 32a.

  Next, when a condition for stopping the rotating reel is satisfied, that is, an angle at which the symbol (target symbol) selected by the stop operation can be derived and displayed when the rotor 32a steps out by an overshoot amount described later. When the angle position reaches the position (target stop angle position), the process shifts from the excited state of the two phases to the reel stop control. For example, when the condition for stopping the reel is established in the period shown in FIG. 9B as the stop condition establishment step, the process proceeds to stop control after waiting until time Ta when the two phases are excited. .

  The reel stop control is performed in two stages as indicated by T1 and T2 in FIG. The control performed at T1 is referred to as two-phase excitation stop control, and the control performed at T2 is referred to as three-phase excitation stop control.

  The two-phase excitation stop control is started from the time Ta when the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method and the state is changed from the state in which the one phase is excited to the state in which the two phases are excited. In this control, the excited state is held for a predetermined hold time T1. For example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the state in which (φ1, φ2) is excited is held for the hold time T1 from the time when (φ1, φ2) is excited to the state in which (φ1) is excited. To do. As a result, rapid braking is applied to the rotor 32a of each reel motor that has rotated at a high speed.

  The hold time T1 is determined according to the amount of overshoot that will cause a step-out, and varies depending on the magnitude of the holding torque of the reel motor, the inertia of the rotor 32a, the spring constant, and the like. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the amount of overshoot is four steps of the stepping motor, and the hold time T1 is set as a time required for the reel motor to drive for three steps. Then, the target stop angle position of the rotor 32a is set three steps ahead from the stage where the two-phase excitation stop control is started in accordance with the hold time T1.

  For this reason, at the time Tb when the hold time T1 has elapsed, the rotor 32a is in a position immediately before the target stop angle position, and the rotational speed is braked. Therefore, at the time of Tb, the excitation pattern is switched to start the three-phase excitation stop control. That is, φ1 is demagnetized, and the stop phase φ3 corresponding to the target stop angle position and the two brake phases φ2 and φ4 at opposite positions across the stop phase are excited for a predetermined time T2. Thus, the rotor 32a stops at the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3, that is, the target stop angle position while obtaining the brakes by the brake phases φ2 and φ4. As a result, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a stops at the target stop position where the target symbol can be derived and displayed without being vibrated accurately.

  After the three-phase excitation stop control is executed during T2 (Tc), the brake phases φ2 and φ4 are demagnetized, and the motor voltage is changed from H to L while maintaining the excitation state of the stop phase φ3. The reason why the excited state of the stop phase φ3 is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is that the rotor 32a deviates from the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3 due to the phase difference between the holding torque and the detent torque or the deviation due to the effect of friction. It is for preventing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reel from moving finely after being temporarily stopped and the angular position of the rotor 32a when the reel motor is started next time from being shifted from the angular position at the time of stopping.

  The excitation state of the stop phase φ3 that is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is a predetermined time (30 seconds in this embodiment) without performing the next game start operation, and shifts to a standby state (demonstration effect). Is released (Td). In other words, after the rotor 32a is stopped, when a predetermined time has passed without the next game starting operation being performed, all of φ1 to φ4 are demagnetized. For this reason, for example, there is no burden on the components and the like constituting the stepping motor due to the heat generated when the excitation phase is continuously excited for a long time, so that deterioration of these components can be prevented. Further, in this embodiment, the excited state is released at the timing when the state in which the next game start operation is not performed continues for a predetermined time and shifts to the standby state (demonstration effect), so that while the player is playing Can maintain a state in which the symbols arranged on the reels are not easily displaced, while it is possible to reduce the load on the components of the stepping motor in a state where the possibility that the player is playing is low.

  As described above, in order to start the rotation of the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. In this embodiment, the two-phase excitation stop control and the three-phase excitation control are performed. By performing the stop control of the reel motor in combination with the excitation stop control, the rotation of the rotor 32a is rapidly braked by the two-phase excitation stop control and is guided to the target stop angle position, and thereafter by the three-phase excitation stop control. Since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position by excitation of the stop phase while obtaining the brake by excitation of the two brake phases at opposite positions across the stop phase of the target stop angle position, the rotor 32a is rotating. The rotor 32a can be stopped at the target stop angle position without vibrating. Furthermore, since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a is specified, so that the reel can be smoothly rotated at the start of rotation.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the payout rate being lower in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantages decrease stepwise in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a stop phase work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work that stores data that is inconvenient if it is initialized at the end of BB and CB, such as various display devices, LED display data, I / O port 41d input / output data, game time clock counter, etc. . The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of BB and CB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, and the total number of medals paid out in BB and CB. The special work is a work that stores data to be initialized only before the start of setting, such as data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90 and various software random numbers. The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored. After initializing 0 before setting is started (before shifting to the setting change mode), 1 is stored. The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored. The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stored, and data indicating the stop phase is stored when the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are stopped. The Rukoto. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is established by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. In this case, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a operates when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON, when a RAM error occurs, when starting only when the setting key switch 37 is ON, BB When the CB ends, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both OFF and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed, six initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied. In this case, five types of initialization are performed in different areas to be initialized according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is performed when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON at the time of start-up, and initialization is performed before the transition to the setting change mode or when a RAM abnormality error occurs. In initialization 0, all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the storage area of the RAM 41c other than the used stack area are initialized. Initialization 1 is an initialization performed only when the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of start-up and shifts to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, in the storage area of the RAM 41c, All areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) other than the in-use stack area and the stop phase work are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of BB and CB. In initialization 2, a general work, an unused area, and an unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an OFF state at the time of activation, and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The stored work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, initialization 0 and initialization 1 are performed before transition to the setting change mode. However, they may be performed at the end of the setting change mode, that is, after the setting is confirmed. In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the determined set value is lost. Therefore, the set value work is not initialized.

  As described above, in order to start the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. If the data in the RAM 41c including the data indicating the stop phase is initialized, it is impossible to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a after changing the setting. When the reel motor is first rotated, Since the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to the excitation phase and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation, the rotation mode of the reel becomes unsightly and the player has forgotten that the setting has been changed. There is a problem of end.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, data indicating the stop phase when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are stopped (0, 1, 2, and 3 indicate φ1, φ2, φ3, and φ4, respectively) is allocated to the RAM 41c. By setting the stopped phase work, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a can be specified. When only the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of start-up, and when shifting to the setting change mode, the RAM 41c is initialized, but the stop phase work is not initialized. Even in the gaming state, data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R stored in the stop phase work is maintained. For this reason, even when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are first rotated after the setting is changed, it is possible to specify the exact stop position of these rotors 32a. It becomes possible to start rotation smoothly. As a result, the reel does not vibrate when the reel is first rotated after the setting is changed, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  In addition, both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an ON state at the time of start-up, and the RAM 41c including the stop phase work can be initialized when shifting to the setting change mode. Therefore, it is possible to select whether or not to initialize the stationary phase work depending on the operation method when shifting to the setting change mode at the time of startup. As a result, it is possible to initialize the RAM 41c including the stop phase work, so that an illegal program or the like becomes resident by using the stop phase work assigned to store the excitation phase of the stepping motor. Can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the RAM 41c is initialized when only the setting key switch 37 is activated and shifted to the setting change mode. At this time, by not initializing the stop phase work, By maintaining the data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R stored in the stop phase work even in the gaming state after the setting change, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are first rotated after the setting change. Even in this case, these stop phases can be specified, but even when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared as the set value is changed, a specific initial excitation phase is set as the stop phase work. The excitation phase indicated by the data set for the stop phase work is excited before the game can be started after the setting is changed. 32L, 32C, when rotating the 32R, may be able to identify these stop phases.

  Specifically, by clearing the data in the RAM 41c as the set value is changed, 0 indicating φ1 which is the initial excitation phase is set in the stop phase work. After the data indicating the initial excitation phase φ1 is set in the stop phase work, the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work, that is, the initial excitation phase φ1 is excited before the game can be started. . The data indicating the initial excitation phase is set in the stop phase work by clearing the stop phase work in the RAM 41c, but the data set in the stop phase work is changed to the data indicating the initial excitation phase. By updating, data indicating the initial excitation phase may be set in the stop phase work.

  As a result, even when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared along with the change of the set value, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to φ1 which is the initial excitation phase before the game can be started, and the angular position of the rotor 32a. And the excitation phase indicated by the data set for the stop phase work can be made to coincide with each other. Thereafter, when the reel motor is started in the first game, the data in which the angular position of the rotor 32a is set to the stop phase work is obtained. Since excitation is started in a state that coincides with the excitation phase shown, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a can be started smoothly. Therefore, when the reel is rotated for the first time after the setting is changed, the reel does not vibrate, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  Also, when the main CPU 41a is started, even when returning to the state before the power interruption, the specific initial excitation phase is set as the stop phase work, and the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work is changed after the setting change, It is preferable to excite the game before the game can be started. As a result, for example, the correspondence between the angular position of the rotor 32a and the stop phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work by moving the reel manually. Even when the power cannot be removed, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to φ1, which is the initial excitation phase, when the power is turned on, and the angular position of the rotor 32a and the excitation phase indicated by the data set for the stop phase workpiece can be matched. Thereafter, when starting the reel motor in the first game, the angular position of the rotor 32a matches the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work. Since starting the excited by state, it is possible to smoothly start the reels are integrally coupled with the rotor 32a.

  In addition, the excitation state of the initial excitation phase is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds, without waiting for the game start operation) as in the stop phase excitation state maintained after the rotor 32a is stopped. It is preferable to be released when the state (the same timing as the transition to the demonstration effect) has elapsed, and in this way there will be no burden on the parts that make up the stepping motor. Deterioration can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the overflow tank 35 is full based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a, and when it is determined that the full tank is full, a reset operation (reset switch 23 or reset) is performed. The operation is controlled to a full error state that disables the progress of the game until the / setting switch 38 is operated).

  In this embodiment, medals inserted from the outside are first stored in the hopper tank 34a, and the overflow medals are stored in the overflow tank 35 when the hopper tank 34a is full. Whether or not the full tank state of the tank 35 is detected by the full tank sensor 35a and the full tank state is determined. However, whether or not the overflow tank 35 is provided and the storage amount of the hopper tank 34a is equal to or greater than a certain amount. May be provided, and the full tank state of the hopper tank 34a may be detected by the full tank sensor to determine the full tank state. In addition, a first full sensor that detects whether or not the amount stored in the hopper tank 34a is equal to or greater than a certain amount is provided. When the first full sensor detects that the hopper tank 34a is full, the flow path of the inserted medal is set. In addition to switching to the overflow tank 35 side, a second full tank sensor for detecting the full tank state of the overflow tank 35 is provided, and the full tank state is determined based on detection of one or both of the first full sensor and the second full sensor. You may make it determine. For example, even when the second full sensor detects the full state, the medal stored in the hopper tank 34a may be paid out and the first full sensor may not detect the full state. By switching the medal flow path again to the hopper tank 34a side, medals can be stored until both tanks are full. Further, in such a case, even if only the second full sensor detects the full state, it is not determined that the full state is reached, and both the first full sensor and the second full sensor are full. By determining that the tank is full when it is detected, it is possible to further reduce the frequency at which it is determined that the tank is full.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the output state of the detection signal output from the full sensor 35a in the switch input determination process performed every 2.24 ms in the timer interrupt process. In the switch input determination process, when input determination of other switches (start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) is performed, the state is switched from the off state to the on state, and continuously (for a certain period of time) The number of times assigned for each switch type) On the condition that the switch is determined to be ON, the ON state of the switch is determined and the detection flag of the switch is set in the RAM 41c. For 35a, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by switching from the off state to the on state, and the detection flag of the sensor is set in the RAM 41c. This is because the full sensor 35a is driven at a higher voltage than the other switches, and even if noise or the like occurs, there is little voltage fluctuation and erroneous detection is less likely to occur. In this way, in the switch input determination process, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by the detection signal of the full sensor 35a changing from off to on, and the duration from when the full sensor 35a changes from off to on. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control related to the determination of the detection state of the full sensor 35a.

  The main CPU 41a determines whether or not it is in a full state based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a (the presence or absence of a detection flag) only once per game at the timing when the insertion of a medal is first detected after the end of the game control. If it is determined that the full tank sensor 35a is on, the full tank flag is determined and a full tank flag indicating the full tank state is set in the RAM 41c. However, in the next game in which the re-game player wins, the game ends. The medal is not allowed to be inserted until the medals are inserted, and the insertion of medals is not effectively detected. In the next game in which the re-game player wins, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Even if the full sensor 35a is detected, it is not determined that the full tank state is reached, and the full tank flag is not set. The main CPU 41a detects the inserted medal sensor 31 even when the insertion of medals is not permitted. However, even if the insertion of a medal is detected during the replay game, the main CPU 41a inserts a valid medal. In this case, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Even when the main CPU 41a is in a state in which medals can be inserted after the game control is finished, the medals are inserted even when the number of bets is set using credits and the game starts without inserting medals. In such a case, the determination as to whether or not the tank is full is omitted, and even when the full sensor 35a is detected, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is set. There is nothing.

  Further, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the full tank flag is set at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the full tank state is determined. When the tongue flag is set, the progress of the game is disabled, and a full error state is controlled until a reset operation is performed. The main CPU 41a determines whether or not the replay game in-process flag is set in the RAM 41c before determining whether or not the full tank flag is set after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the game is a replay game. If it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not the full tank flag is set is omitted. In such a case, even if the full tank flag is set, a full tank error state is set. Is not controlled, and if the replay game ends and is not a replay game, the full tank flag is determined at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 10, when the insertion of a medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control, it is determined whether or not the full tank sensor 35a is full based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. If it is on, it is determined that the tank is full and a full tank flag is set in the RAM 41c. After that, if the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, after the control of the game is finished, the full-game error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted. On the other hand, when the re-gamer wins in the game and the replay game flag is set (not shown), the full game error state is not controlled after the game ends, and the next game (replay game) After the completion of, the full-error error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game (or the next game if the next game is also a replay game) can be inserted. That is, in the game next to the game in which the re-game player wins, the full tank error state is not controlled.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the game next to the game won by the re-gamer, the insertion of medals is not permitted and the insertion of medals is not detected effectively. Even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected in the state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, when the re-player is not won in the game and the medal can be inserted, it is determined that the medal is inserted for the first time when the medal is detected, and the game is full. If the tongue flag is set in the RAM 41c and the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, it is controlled to a full tank error state at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the end of the control of the game.

  Although not particularly illustrated, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, if the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without the medal being inserted, No charging is detected, and even if the full sensor 35a is detected in such a state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, the medal can be inserted, and when the insertion of the medal is first detected, it is determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is set in the RAM 41c. In other words, a game is played by setting the number of bets using credits, and if no medal is inserted during that time, a full tank error state is not determined until the next game where a medal is inserted. There is no control.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, after the game control is finished, the medal stored in the overflow tank 35 is detected only once per game at the timing when the insertion of the medal is first detected based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. It is determined whether or not the amount of storage is full, and if it is determined that the tank is full, the game progress is disabled and controlled to a full tank error state until a reset operation is performed. For example, when a replay game or a credit is used, in a game in which medals are not inserted from the outside, monitoring whether or not the amount of stored medals stored in the overflow tank 35 is full, The amount of game media stored in the overflow tank 35 is full even though the medal storage amount does not increase. In addition to being unnecessarily monitored whether or not it has become unnecessary, it is controlled by a full-fill error more frequently than necessary, which causes annoyance to the player and increases the labor of the game hall clerk. There is a problem that it ends up.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the next replay game in which the re-game player has won a prize as described above, the insertion of medals is not permitted until the game ends, so that the insertion of medals is detected effectively. The determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is not wasted, and the full tank can be monitored efficiently. It can reduce the control load required to determine the tank status and reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible, making the player feel bothersome and reducing the labor of the store clerk to eliminate the full tank status. Is possible.

  In addition, since the determination of the full tank state is made when the insertion of the medal is detected, in the replay game in which the insertion of the medal is prohibited, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is inevitably omitted. Thus, in performing the control for omitting the determination of whether or not the replay game is full, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the game is a replay game.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, whether or not a full error has occurred at the timing when the insertion of medals is first detected in a state where the medals of the next game can be inserted, that is, at the timing when medals stored in the overflow tank 35 increase. Since the determination is performed, the full tank state can be determined at an efficient timing.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, when the insertion of the second medal or the third medal is detected in a state where the medal of the next game can be inserted, the bet number is set using credits. In some cases, an insufficient amount of bets may be set by inserting medals. In such a case, the game is determined to be full in the game even though the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 has increased. In this embodiment, after the game control is completed, the full tank state is detected at the timing when the insertion of the medal is first detected in the state where the medal of the next game can be inserted. Therefore, in a game in which the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 increases, it becomes possible to reliably detect the full tank state.

  Further, in this embodiment, even when the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the bet amount is set using the credit, and when the game starts without the medal being inserted, The determination of whether or not the state is in a state is omitted, and in a game in which no medal is inserted and the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase, it is useless to determine whether or not a full tank error has occurred. It is possible to monitor the full tank condition efficiently, reduce the control load required to determine the full tank condition, and reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible. , It is possible to reduce the labor for the store clerk to eliminate the full state.

  In addition, since the full state is determined when the insertion of a medal is detected, the number of bets is set using credits, and it is inevitable when the game starts without a medal being inserted. The determination of whether or not the vehicle is full is omitted, and when the number of bets is set using credits and the game starts without a medal being inserted, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is full. In performing the control not to be performed, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the credit is used.

  In this embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted, and when the full tank flag is set, It is controlled to a full tank error state before the next game medal can be inserted. For this reason, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated once in a state where the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating by being controlled to a full tank error state from the start of the game to the end of the control of the game. The rotation state is stopped, and the full tank error state is controlled. Thereafter, when the full tank error state is canceled, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated again, or the hopper motor 34b is driven to perform the medal payout operation. It is not necessary to perform complicated control such as stopping the medal payout operation once in a state of being in a state, controlling to a full tank error state, and then restarting the medal payout operation when the full tank error state is canceled. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and the control related to the progress of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  In the present embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. It is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set. If the full tank flag is set, the full tank error state may be controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, even when the full tank state is determined after the game control is completed and the full tank flag is set, if the re-gamer has won a prize in the previous game and the next game is a replay game, the game is full. Since it is not controlled by the tan error state, the frequency of full tan errors can be further reduced, so that it is possible to make the player feel bothersome and reduce the labor for the store clerk to resolve the full tank state. It becomes.

  Further, in this embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the tank is full is made at the timing when the insertion of the medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control, but whether or not the tank is full at least once per game. For example, after completion of the game control, it may be determined whether or not the next game medal can be filled up, or whether the game is started. A determination may be made as to whether or not the tank is full at the time of detection or when the game control ends.

  Here, a modified example of the control in the full tank error state will be described. In this modified example, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not it is in a full state based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game at the timing before the medal insertion of the next game is permitted after the game control is finished. However, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game based on the replay game flag before determining whether or not the tank is full, and determines that the game is a replay game. In the case, it is further determined whether or not the medal insertion flag is set, that is, whether or not a medal is inserted in the previous game, and only when it is determined that the medal insertion flag is set, the full tank state Whether or not is determined. For this reason, when the re-gamer wins in the previous game and no medals need to be inserted in the game (when the game is a replay game), or the bet number is set using credits in the previous game, When the game starts without being inserted, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the determination as to whether or not it is full is omitted, and the full state is not determined.

  When the main CPU 41a determines that the game is full, the main CPU 41a disables the progress of the game at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted, and controls to the full error state until a reset operation is performed. To do. The main CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game before determining whether or not the game is full after the game control is finished. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled. On the other hand, if it is not a replay game, it is determined whether or not medals have been inserted in the previous game, and if no medals have been inserted in the previous game, determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled, and if a medal is inserted in the previous game, the game control after the next game is over and the next It is determined whether or not a full tank state is reached at the timing before the medal of the game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, and the next game is a replay game. If not, it is further determined whether or not a medal has been inserted in the previous game, and if a medal has been inserted in the previous game, it is determined whether or not a full tank state has been reached based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. When it is determined that the full tank state is reached, the full tank error state is controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 13, after the game control is finished, when the medal insertion flag is not set, that is, when the number of bets is set using credits in the previous game, and the game starts without inserting medals. In this state, it is not determined whether or not the full tank state is reached. Even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in this state, it is controlled to the full tank error state after the game control of the game is finished. There is nothing. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), the state is determined to be full, and the full error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, when the next game is a replay game after the game control is finished, that is, when a re-game player wins a prize in the previous game and it is not necessary to insert a medal in the game, It is not determined whether or not the vehicle is in the tan state, and even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in such a state, the full tank error state is not controlled after the game control of the game is finished. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), the state is determined to be full, and the full error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In this modified example, as described above, after the game control is finished and before the medal of the next game can be inserted, it is only once per game based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a. If it is determined that the game is full, the game progress is disabled and controlled to a full tank error state until a reset operation is performed. Before, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game, and if it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not it is full is omitted. It is possible to monitor the full tank state efficiently, reduce the control load required to determine the full tank state, and reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible. Or allowed to think, it is possible to reduce the effort for the clerk to eliminate the full state.

  Further, in the modified example, when the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without inserting medals, the determination as to whether or not the game is full is omitted after the game control ends. In the case where no medal is inserted and the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase, the determination of whether or not the full tank error has occurred is not made wastefully, and the full tank state is efficiently obtained. It can be monitored and the control load required to determine the full tank status can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible. Can be reduced.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full. After the game is over, the overflow tank 35 is determined. A full tank state can be determined before the number of medals increases. When the full tank state is determined, a full tank error state is set before the next game medal can be inserted, so that the progress of the game is disabled before the medal increases in the overflow tank 35, The amount of storage in the overflow tank 35 will not increase any more, and the full tank error state is controlled between the start of the game and the end of the control of the game, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, When the 2R is rotating, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped once and controlled to a full tank error state, and then the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are restarted when the full tank error state is released. Or when the medal payout operation is stopped by driving the hopper motor 34b, the medal payout operation is once stopped, and a full tank error state occurs. Controlling, when it is released subsequently fully Tan'era state, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such or to resume dispensing operation of medals. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and the control related to the progress of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated. In addition, since the determination of the full tank state and the accompanying control of the full tank error state are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full at the end of the game control. Even if it is determined whether or not, the full tank state can be determined after the game is over and before the medal is increased in the overflow tank 35.

  Also, in this case, when a full tank state is determined, the full tank error state may be controlled before proceeding to the next game. In this case, the game control is once interrupted and then the game It is not necessary to perform control such as resuming control of the game, and it is possible to prevent the control related to the progress of the game from becoming complicated. In addition, since the determination of the full tank state and the accompanying control of the full tank error state are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  Next, commands that the main CPU 41a transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a sends a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a gaming state command, a standby command to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a stop command, an error command, an initialization command, a setting end command, a power-on command, an operation detection command, and a door command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number. When a medal is inserted, the one-BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 is operated to set the bet number. Sent when

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted every time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The game state command indicates the game state of the next game (normal game state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3), RT (4)) , BB, RB, CB, CT, etc.) and the remaining number of games in RT (1) to (3), currently set settings This command can specify a value, and is transmitted after a setting end command, which will be described later, and at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and after one game is over, a credit (which was used for setting the bet number) is set when the transition to the standby state is made after a predetermined time without setting the bet number. (Including medals) is sent out after the medal payout is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized and the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the RAM 41c is initialized and shifts to the setting change mode.

  The setting end command is a command indicating the end of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  The power-on command is a command that indicates whether or not one of the special roles has been won at power-on, and if it can be restored to the state before the power interruption at startup, it returns to the state before the power interruption. Sent when.

  The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, that is, ON (open state) / OFF (closed state). When the power is turned on, one game is finished (after the game is over, the bet number of the next game) Sent before the setting can be started), and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes (ON to OFF, OFF to ON).

  The operation detection command is the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10, that is, ON / OFF, and these switches are effective in the progress of the game. Whether the bet number can be set and the specified number of bets has not yet been set, and the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 has been accepted. It is valid when credits remain and is invalid otherwise.Acceptance of the operation of the start switch 7 is valid until the start switch 7 is operated after the specified number of bets is set, otherwise The operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is accepted after the reels are rotated at a constant speed and the reels are ready to stop. It is valid until each stop operation is detected, otherwise it is invalid.The settlement switch 10 has a credit remaining or a bet amount is set in the period from the end of the game to the start of the next game. This command is valid when the switch is active, and otherwise is invalid.) When the detection state of these switches changes, whether the acceptance of the operation is valid for the progress of the game, Sent regardless of invalid period.

  Of these commands, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated in a startup process and a game process described later, temporarily stored in a normal command transmission buffer provided in a special work of the RAM 41c, and the timer interrupt process described above. Sent in (main).

  The normal command transmission buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  The door command is stored in a door command transmission buffer provided in a special work in the RAM 41c in the door monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  The door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one door command can be stored is allocated. The door command transmission buffer stores a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at the time of power-on or at the end of one game, and after the change of the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Stored is a door command indicating the detected state. Further, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is not cleared even after the door command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored door command. When the power is turned on or one game is finished, the door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set, and the door command transmission request 1 is set or the door is opened. When the detection state of the detection switch 25 changes, the door command transmission request 2 is set. When this door command transmission request 2 is set, the door stored in the door command transmission buffer is set. Command transmission is instructed.

  The operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer provided in the special work of the RAM 41c in the switch monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above. The

  The operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one operation detection command can be stored is allocated. The operation detection command transmission buffer includes a single BET switch 5, a MAXBET switch 6, a start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and a detection state after the change when the detection state of the checkout switch 10 changes. An operation detection command indicating validity / invalidity of each switch at the time is stored. In addition, the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is not cleared after the operation detection command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored operation detection command. It has become. An operation detection command transmission request is set when the detection state of any of these switches changes, and an operation detection command transmission buffer is set by setting the operation detection command transmission request. The operation detection command stored in the command is transmitted.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a executes timer interrupt processing at intervals of 0.56 ms. In the timer interrupt process, timer interrupts 1 to 4 are repeatedly performed, and processes unique to these timer interrupts 1 to 4 are performed at intervals of 2.24 ms. The command transmission process for transmitting the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is a timer allocation. The command transmission process is also executed at intervals of 2.24 ms.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 91a acquires a command buffered in a reception buffer, which will be described later, in a timer interrupt process (sub) that is executed at an interval of 1.12 ms. For this reason, every time the main CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process, that is, when a command transmission process is performed at an interval of 0.56 ms, there is a possibility that the sub-control unit 91 cannot receive the command normally.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main CPU 41a executes the command transmission process at a rate of once per four timer interrupt processes, that is, at an interval of 2.24 ms. By transmitting only one of the command stored in the transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer, a plurality of commands can be transmitted. Even in the case of continuous transmission, transmission is performed with an interval of at least 2.24 ms, and these continuously transmitted commands can be reliably acquired on the sub-control unit 91 side.

  In the present embodiment, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated according to the progress of the game in the activation process or the game process, and stored in the normal command transmission buffer. In the door command, when the door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set in the activation process or the game process, or the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is changed. In this case, it is stored in the door command transmission buffer. The operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer when the detection state of any one of the BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 changes. Is done.

  In the command transmission process in the timer interrupt 2, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, an untransmitted door command transmission request stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command transmission buffer When a transmission request for the stored operation detection command is detected, a delay time is set, and when the set delay time elapses, the unsent command and door command transmission buffer stored in the normal command transmission buffer The operation command stored in the door or the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  Specifically, in the command transmission process, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. When detected, the random number for delay set in the range of 0 to 17 is acquired and set in the delay counter provided in the special work of the RAM 41c.

  At this time, in the command transmission process in which the delay counter value is set and the command transmission process executed in the timer interrupt 2 thereafter, the delay counter value is decremented by 1 and when the delay counter value becomes 0, An untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  That is, the command detected in the command transmission process is a time corresponding to a multiple of the command transmission process execution interval (2.24 ms). Specifically, the command transmission process is performed by subtracting 1 from the delay counter value acquired at that time. Is transmitted after the elapse of time (2.24 ms) {0 to 35.84 ms because the delay counter value is 0 to 17}.

  In addition, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer are interrupted by the basic processing. Since it is performed within (main), processing is not delayed due to command delay.

  Further, in this embodiment, an area capable of storing a plurality of commands is provided in the normal command transmission buffer, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, Alternatively, a newly generated command can be stored in an empty area of the normal command transmission buffer without waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. That is, a plurality of commands can be stored in the normal command transmission buffer. For this reason, it can be avoided that the progress of the game is stopped due to the delay of the command transmission. This is not the case when the normal command transmission buffer is full of untransmitted commands.

  In the command storage process, when a plurality of commands are stored in the normal command transmission buffer, these commands are stored in the order of generation. In the command transmission process, the commands are transmitted in the order stored in the normal command transmission buffer. It is like that. That is, the commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer are transmitted in the order in which they are generated.

  Note that the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with the highest priority. Before the power-on command or initialization command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, other normal commands ( Hereinafter, commands other than the door command, operation detection command, power-on command, and initialization command are called normal commands) (in the case of an initialization command, store in the normal command transmission buffer before that) Even if the normal command is not already stored since the data is also cleared, the power-on command or the initialization command is transmitted with priority.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer and a door command transmission is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set), in principle, the normal command transmission buffer. The door commands stored in the door command transmission buffer are transmitted with priority over the commands stored in.

  Note that when the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is a power-on command or an initialization command, or when the normal command transmission buffer stored in the normal command transmission buffer is waiting (delayed), the door command However, this is not the case when a request for transmission is requested, and the power-on command, initialization command, or normal command waiting to be transmitted is given priority, and the power-on command, initialization command, or normal command waiting to be transmitted After being sent, send a door command. If an untransmitted normal command remains in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting a normal command waiting for transmission, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is preferentially transmitted.

  In addition, when a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, an operation detection command transmission is requested (when an operation detection command transmission request is set), or door command transmission and operation detection. When command transmission is requested at the same time, as a rule, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer or the door command transmission buffer is stored rather than the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. Priority is given to the door command being sent.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer (during delay), or when transmission of a door command is requested However, the operation detection command waiting for transmission is transmitted with priority, and after the operation detection command waiting for transmission is transmitted, the normal command or the door command is transmitted.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms. Specifically, in any of the timer interrupts 1 to 4 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, in the port input process performed every 0.56 ms, an input state (door) in which the detection signal from the door open detection switch 25 is converted to a positive logic Open detection switch 25ON = 1 (door open state), door open detection switch 25OFF = 0 (door closed state)), and is performed by timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, every 2.24 ms. In the door monitoring process to be performed, the detection state of the detection signal of the door opening detection switch 25 acquired in the port input process described above (the input state that is the same for two consecutive times) is logically ORed for about 100 ms (45 times of the door monitoring process). Subsequently, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is determined using the result. If the calculation result is 1 when about 100 ms elapses, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is ON. If the calculation result is 0, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is not turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Otherwise, it is determined that the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 has changed, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is updated to a door command indicating the detection state after the change, and the door command transmission request 2 Is set to command transmission of the door command. When determining that the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has changed, the main CPU 41a requests an update of the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  The main CPU 41a sets the door command transmission request 1 in the activation process or the game process when the power is turned on or at the end of one game, and requests transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. On the other hand, in the door monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the door command transmission request 1 is set. If the door command transmission request 1 is set, it is determined that there is a door command transmission request and the door command transmission is performed. Request 2 is set to command transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. In addition, when the door command transmission request 1 is set, the main CPU 41a requests an update of the door open signal output state for the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  In this way, when commanding the transmission of the door command, it is also required to update the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000, so the output state of the door opening signal is linked to the door command transmission command. And is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the door command is given priority over the normal command as described above, and the door command is transmitted after a delay time determined at random has passed as in the case of other commands. On the other hand, since the maximum command delay time is 35.84 ms, when transmission of a door command is requested in a state where the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, after the door command is transmitted, Further, it takes about 72 ms until the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted. However, the monitoring interval of the door open detection switch 25 is further stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. If the detected state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed if it is shorter than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command being stored, the normal command transmission buffer is stored while the change continues. Normal command transmission buffer will not be sent, so normal command transmission buffer overflows There is a possibility become. For this reason, in this embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is about longer than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. Even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed, the normal command is transmitted after the door command is transmitted until the next door command is transmitted. At least one normal command stored in the transmission buffer can be transmitted, so that the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection states of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 about every 10 ms. Specifically, in the above-described port input process performed every 0.56 ms, an input state in which detection signals from the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 are converted to positive logic. (ON = 1, OFF = 0) is acquired, and the timer interrupt process (main) is performed by timer interrupt 2, that is, the switch monitoring process performed every 2.24 ms, the 1 acquired in the above-described port input process The detection state of the detection signals of the sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 (input state that is the same for two consecutive times) is about 10 ms (door monitoring process 5 Times) Continue to logically OR each separately, and use the result, 1 BET switch 5, MAXB Determining T switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, the detection state of the adjusting switch 10. When the calculation result is 1 when about 10 ms elapses, that is, when ON is detected even once during that time, it is determined that the corresponding switch is ON, and when the calculation result is 0, that is, during that time If ON is not detected even once, it is determined that the corresponding switch is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of each switch indicated by the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state. The operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is changed to an operation detection command that indicates the detection state after the change and indicates the validity / invalidity of each switch at that time. Update, set operation detection command transmission request, and instruct transmission of the operation detection command.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  The sub CPU 91a executes a command reception interrupt process when a strobe signal indicating the transmission of a command from the main CPU 41a is input. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  The receiving buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 128 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub CPU 91a is the earliest stage. Based on the received command, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to. Based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table, various effects such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, etc. Control the device.

  In this embodiment, the time interval (1.12 ms) at which the sub CPU 91a performs the timer interrupt process (sub) is shorter than the time interval (2.24 ms) at which the main CPU 41a transmits a command. If an operation associated with a normal game is performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is not received until the next command is received even when commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. It is read by the timer interrupt process (sub), and a plurality of unprocessed commands are not accumulated in the reception buffer. When a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a is received, the timer interrupt process performed first after that The command received by (sub) is read and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub CPU 91a receives the command, the sub CPU 91a, among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table, With reference to the control pattern corresponding to the received command type, the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the sub CPU 91a receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and responds to the newly received command. An effect based on the control pattern is executed. In other words, even if the production has not been completed until the end, when a new command is received, the production that has been executed is canceled and a new command is received unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when an operation for setting the number of bets is performed during execution of an effect, that is, when the sub CPU 91a receives a BET command indicating that the number of bets has been set, the effect being executed is canceled. It is supposed to be. For this reason, if the player wants to proceed to the next game rather than seeing the production to the end, the production is canceled and the next game can be started. There is no. Further, when a credit or bet amount adjustment operation is performed during the performance, that is, after the sub CPU 91a receives a game state command indicating the end of the game, and before receiving an internal winning command indicating the start of the game. When the payout start command is received, the performance being executed is stopped. Credits and bets are settled when the game is terminated. In such a case, by terminating the performance that is being executed, there is an intention to end the game, but the performance continues unnecessarily. It is designed not to be overwhelmed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the sub CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, it is registered in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The selected selection pattern is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected production pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the production pattern of the game.

  The control pattern table contains specific controls that are referred to when a specific command (standby command, stop command, error command, initialization command, setting end command, power-on command indicating that special role is elected, etc.) is received. When the pattern is stored and the sub CPU 91a receives these specific commands, the sub CPU 91a refers to the specific control pattern corresponding to the command regardless of the effect pattern set in the game, and The rendering device is controlled based on the pattern.

  When a standby command is received, a demo pattern for executing a demonstration effect (demonstration effect) is referred to as a control pattern. In addition, when the final effect that informs the winning of the special role is being executed, the execution of the demo effect is prohibited, and the demo pattern is controlled even if a standby command is received in such a state. It is not referred to as a pattern, and no demonstration effect is executed.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described demo pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the stop state is released, the demonstration effect is executed.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning.

  When the initialization command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the setting end command is received, the demo pattern described above is referred to as a control pattern. In other words, when an initialization command is received, a notification during setting change is executed, and when a setting end command is received thereafter, a demonstration effect is executed.

  When a power-on command indicating that a special role is won is received, a special role notification pattern for notifying that the special role has been won is referred to. That is, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is won is received, a notification effect for notifying that the special role is won is executed. Note that the notification effect for notifying the winning of the special combination is once executed until it receives a winning determination command indicating that the special combination has won.

  Regardless of whether or not the effect state before power interruption can be restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c at the time of activation, the sub CPU 91a receives an initialization command or a power-on command before actually starting the effect. Wait until either is received. When the initialization command is received in this state, the data in the RAM 91c is cleared. In addition, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected is received in this state, a notice effect indicating that the special role is elected is executed, and when a power-on command indicating that the special role is not elected is received, If it is possible to return to the performance state before the power interruption, the demonstration is performed. Also, in the state of waiting for receiving the initialization command or the power-on command, the execution of the timer interrupt process that executes the presentation based on the reception of the command is not permitted, and even when other commands are received, An effect based on the command is not performed, and no effect is performed until the initialization command or the power-on command is received after the startup and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted.

  For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected when the power is turned on and the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected thereafter, the sub control unit 91 does not Since no initialization command has been received, the production control is not performed, and even when the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of startup, the sub control unit 91 is turned on. It is impossible to avoid receiving the command and avoid the execution of the notification effect indicating that the special role is won. Thus, when the main control unit 41 is started, the state before power interruption is restored, and before power interruption. When the special role is elected, the winning of the special role is surely notified.

  On the other hand, it is necessary to turn off the power once to connect unauthorized tools such as driving tools (disconnecting the connector without turning off the power). With the above configuration, the connector is forcibly released. Even if the special tool is won by using a driving tool, it can be easily determined from the outside that the special role is won when the main control unit 41 is restarted. , A slot machine set in a state where a special role is won using a driving tool, and a state where there is a high possibility that BB (1) having higher advantage among CB and BB (1) described later is won (In this embodiment, it is suggested that BB (1) may be won when the combination of watermelons or chances are aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5 as will be described later. ( ) It is possible to set and are likely the state elected.) Can be effectively suppressed illegal sales such offers to the player customer in the amusement shop sales start like.

  Further, the notification effect is continuously executed until a winning determination command indicating the winning of the special role is received, that is, until the winning special role is won. For this reason, until the special role wins, that is, until the winning flag of the special role is cleared, the notification effect will not stop, and it is not possible to cancel the notification effect while maintaining the special role win by the amusement store. Therefore, it is possible that a slot machine set in a state where a special role is elected using a driving tool, and BB (1) having higher advantage among CB and BB (1) described later may be elected. It is possible to more effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing slot machines set in a highly promising state to players at the start of business at a game shop or the like.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the main CPU 41a returns to the state before the power interruption and the special CPU is elected before the power interruption. When the sub-control unit 91 transmits a command and receives a power-on command indicating that the special role is won, the sub-control unit 91 controls the liquid crystal display 51 and the effect LED 52 that control the notification effect indicating that the special role is won. , Such as speakers 53, 54, reel LED 55, etc., even if the special role is won illegally, when the main control unit 41 is restarted, the special role is won. Since it is informed by the production device and is in a state where it is easier to discriminate, the slot machine set in the state where the special role is won using the driving tool, and further among BB (1) and CB described later Yo It is possible to more surely prevent illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set to a state where a highly advantageous BB (1) is highly likely to be won to a player at the start of a game shop business. .

  In this embodiment, the special device winning is notified by the effect device controlled by the sub-control unit 91. However, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and When the special role is elected before the interruption of power, the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, and the payout display 13 directly controlled by the main control unit 41 may notify the special role. good. In addition, a notification LED for notifying the winning of the special role is provided as an electronic component that is directly controlled by the main control unit 41. When the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is selected before the power interruption. In this case, the notification LED may be used to notify the winning of the special role.

  Further, in this embodiment, the connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection between the electronic control component (inserted medal sensor 31) that inputs or outputs a signal to the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 as the game progresses. The use of unauthorized devices is also prevented by restricting the release of connections between the connectors, but when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is elected before the power interruption. In this case, it is possible to prevent the use of a driving tool regardless of whether or not a structure for restricting the insertion / removal between the connectors is used, so that the structure for restricting the insertion / removal between the connectors is not used. By doing so, it is not necessary to change the structure of parts in order to regulate the insertion and removal of connectors, and maintainability in the event of a failure, etc. It can be improved.

  Based on the reception of the door command, the sub CPU 91a issues a door opening notification indicating that the front door 1b is opened. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives a door command, if no new door command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the received door command is confirmed and detected. If the confirmation detection state is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed. In the door opening notification, the effect effect LED 52 blinks, the door opening notification screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and an error warning sound is output. After that, the door command is received, and even if 100 ms elapses, the door command is not received and the detection state indicated by the door command becomes the definite detection state. Stop the notification and return to the original performance.

  In addition, when a door command is newly received within 100 ms after the last door command is received, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the previously received command is not set as the definite detection state. If no door command is received even after 100 ms has elapsed since the reception of a new door command, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the last received door command is set as the detection state, and the determination detection state is If it is ON (door open), door open notification is performed, and if the confirmed detection state is OFF (door closed), door open notification is stopped.

  For this reason, even if a door command indicating ON of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening) is received in a state where the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening detection switch 25 is turned OFF (door closing) within 100 ms. When the door command shown is received, the door open notification is not performed, and even if the door command indicating that the door open detection switch 25 is OFF (door closed) is received while the door open notification is being performed, 100 ms thereafter If the door command indicating ON of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening) is received within, the door opening notification is not stopped.

  In addition, when a door command is received continuously within an interval of 100 ms, such as when a new door command is received within 100 ms after receiving a door command and then a new door command is received within 100 ms thereafter. In the meantime, the state of the door opening notification is maintained (if the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening notification is not started, and if the door opening notification is performed, it is continued) After the last received door command, the door opening notification state is determined based on the detection state determined when 100 ms elapses, the door opening notification has been performed so far, and the determined detection state is ON (door opening) If the detected state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is stopped while the door is open until then. If the detection is not performed and the determined detection state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is not performed. If the determined detection state is ON (door opening), the door opening notification is started. .

  Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a only transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and determines whether or not the front door 1b is opened from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command received from the main CPU 41a, and based on the determination result. The door opening notification is performed.

  The front door 1b needs to be opened in order to perform some illegal act on the parts inside the slot machine 1 such as the game control board 40, but in this embodiment, when the front door 1b is opened, that fact Therefore, such fraud can be effectively prevented and can be detected early even if fraud is made.

  Conventionally, in the case of notifying the opening of the front door, the game control is performed based on the signal input to the game control means in spite of the fact that the effect control means performs error notification in order to reduce the control load of the game control means. It is necessary for the means to determine whether or not the front door has been opened, and the control load on the game control means cannot be reduced sufficiently.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms, and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes, the door showing the detection state after the change. Only by transmitting a command, it is not determined whether the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and the sub CPU 91a detects the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command received from the main CPU 41a. It is determined whether or not the front door 1b is open based on the detected state of the door, and the door open notification is performed based on the determination result, so the main CPU 41a notifies the opening of the front door 1b. In determining whether or not the front door 1b is open from the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 (door open detection switch Chi chattering prevention determination of 25) it is not necessary to perform, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main CPU 41a.

  Even when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has not changed, the main CPU 41a transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at that time when the main CPU 41a is activated and when one game is over. Therefore, even when the sub CPU 91a misses the door command at the time of change, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 can be always acquired at the time of starting and at the end of one game. Even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 does not change after the failure, the state in which the change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is not reflected in the door opening notification can be prevented from continuing.

  In addition, the main CPU 41a, as a general rule, when the transmission of the door command is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set) when the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is given priority over the command stored in the command transmission buffer, and the monitoring interval of the door open detection switch 25 and the transmission of the door command are transmitted. The error of the interval can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In the normal command transmission waiting state (during delay) stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the delayed normal command is given priority over the door command, and the delay time has already been reached. Even though the timing is started, the delay control is not complicated by interrupting the timing. Further, the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with priority over all commands including the door command, and the return of the sub CPU 91a is delayed by transmitting other commands first. There is nothing.

  In this embodiment, once the door command transmission request 2 for commanding the transmission of the door command is set once, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes until the door command based on the command is transmitted. The door command is not updated, and even when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 changes while waiting for transmission of the power-on command or the initialization command, the door command is overwritten without being transmitted. Can be prevented.

  Also, in this embodiment, a door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and transmission management becomes complicated when the door command is transmitted with priority over the normal command. There is no end.

  In this embodiment, the door command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. When storing door commands and normal commands in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to disable interrupts when storing normal commands in the transmission buffer. If a door command is stored while interrupting while being stored in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed will be overwritten, and the door command will be partially overwritten after returning. In this configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a normal command is stored, causing reel rotation blur or medal payout However, as described above, the door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer as described above. It is necessary to prohibit interrupts when storing normal commands, even if the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic processing, and stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt processing (main) executed by interrupt. This eliminates the above problems.

  In this embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 until the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted after the door command is transmitted. Therefore, even when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is continuously changed, the next door command is transmitted after the door command is transmitted. In the meantime, at least one normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer can be transmitted so that the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the single BET switch 5, the MAX BET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 are operated based on the reception of the operation detection command. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives an operation detection command, if no new operation detection command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of each switch indicated by the received operation detection command is confirmed and detected. If any of the switches has changed from the OFF state to the ON state as compared to the previous fixed detection state, it is determined that the corresponding switch has been operated, and any of the switches is OFF. If the state has changed to the ON state, it is determined that the operation of the corresponding switch has been released.

  For this reason, even when an operation detection command is received and the detection state of any switch has changed, if an operation detection command indicating the same detection state as before the change is received within 100 ms, The operation or release of the operation is not determined.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, the detection state of the checkout switch 10, that is, ON / OFF, these switches are in progress of the game. Whether an operation detection command indicating whether the switch is in a valid state or an invalid state is valid for the progress of the game when the switch detection state changes. The sub CPU 91a can identify the operation detected by the main CPU 41a regardless of whether or not the operation is valid, so that one sheet is transmitted. Operation of BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, checkout switch 10 In addition to the timing when the control of the game is made effective and coincides with the timing at which the control of the game proceeds, the effect is executed when the operation of these switches is invalid, that is, at a timing not directly related to the control of the progress of the game. It becomes possible.

  In other words, in order to perform a production operation, a new detection means is not installed, but the operation means is originally installed for advancing the game and detected by the main CPU 41a. It is possible to perform operations for performance even in a disabled state in progress, and the sub CPU 91a can perform performance using the operations of these operation means, so that the timing of the performance can be varied. You can have it.

  In addition, it is possible to specify whether the operation of each switch is valid or invalid from the operation detection command, and the sub CPU 91a operates the switch when receiving the operation detection command. An appropriate effect can be executed depending on whether or not the reception period is valid.

  Further, when transmitting the operation detection command, the main CPU 41a transmits an operation detection command indicating the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10. However, it is not determined whether or not the switch is operated based on the detection state. The sub CPU 91a determines that the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the like based on the detection state indicated by the operation detection command received from the main CPU 41a. Since it is determined whether the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R and the checkout switch 10 are operated and the operation status of these switches can be grasped based on the determination result, the main CPU 41a Send operation detection command Therefore, it is not necessary to determine whether or not a switch that is in an invalid period, that is, a switch that is not related to the progress control of the game has been operated (such as a chattering prevention determination), and the control load on the main CPU 41a is reduced. can do.

  In addition, the main CPU 41a requests the operation detection command to be transmitted in a state where the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer (when the operation detection command transmission request is set) or the door command. When transmission and operation detection command transmission are requested at the same time, as a rule, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer or door command transmission rather than operation detection commands stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer are sent. The door command stored in the trust buffer is preferentially transmitted, and the transmission of the normal command and the door command is not delayed by the transmission of the operation detection command.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer (during delay), or when transmission of a door command is requested In this case, the operation detection command during the delay is transmitted with priority, and the delay control is not complicated by interrupting it even though the delay time has already started. .

  Further, in this embodiment, once an operation detection command transmission request for instructing transmission of an operation detection command is set, the detection state of any switch changes until an operation detection command based on the command is transmitted. However, the operation detection command is not updated, and the operation detection command can be prevented from being overwritten without being transmitted.

  In this embodiment, an operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission buffer, and the normal command and the door command are transmitted with priority over the operation detection command. In this case, the transmission management does not become complicated.

  In this embodiment, the operation detection command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. Since it is configured to store in the buffer, if the operation detection command and the normal command are stored in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to prohibit interrupts when storing the normal command in the transmission buffer (normally If an operation detection command is stored by interrupting the command while it is stored in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed will be overwritten, and the operation detection command will be partially overwritten after returning. In such a configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a normal command is stored, causing reel rotation fluctuations and However, there is a possibility that it may affect other controls, such as blurring when paying out the mail. However, as described above, the operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer. Even when the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the command in the basic process, the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic process. It is no longer necessary to prohibit interrupts, and the above problems can be solved.

  The sub CPU 91a and the touch panel controller 99 are connected so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication.

  The sub CPU 91a instructs the touch panel controller 99 to perform a hardware reset at the time of activation, initializes the touch panel controller 99, analyzes the status report transmitted from the touch panel controller 99 upon completion of the initialization, and detects an abnormality. If not, a system-on command is transmitted to activate the touch panel controller 99 system. Accordingly, the touch panel controller 99 shifts to a state where a touch operation can be detected.

  In addition, when the response to the command transmitted to the touch panel controller 99 is not returned even after a certain period of time, even when the sub CPU 91a is not activated, the sub CPU 91a instructs the hardware reset of the touch panel controller 99 similarly to the activation. The system is supposed to restart.

  The touch panel controller 99 determines that the corresponding beam coordinate is a defective beam when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked continuously for 60 seconds based on the signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b. Thereafter, the detection of the touch operation at the beam coordinates determined as the defective beam is invalidated, and the detection of the touch operation is performed only with the validated beam. After that, when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, the detection of the touch operation at the invalidated beam coordinates is enabled again.

  As described above, the touch panel controller 99 determines that the beam is defective when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked continuously for 60 seconds, and invalidates the corresponding beam coordinates. If the light receiving devices 57a, 57b and the light emitting devices 56a, 56b are damaged, if a solid object is attached, or if a defective beam is generated due to the object being placed, only the defective beam is invalidated, The touch operation can be detected by an effective beam, so that the touch panel can function normally even if a defective beam occurs. The touch panel can be used even though the touch operation can be detected by a normal beam. It can be prevented from disappearing.

  In this embodiment, the invalid beam coordinates determined to be a defective beam are validated when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, and are automatically restored. However, for example, the touch panel controller 99 may be restored in response to a hardware reset or the like.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a transmits a defective beam analysis request command every second. When the touch panel controller 99 receives the defective beam analysis request command, the touch panel controller 99 returns a report indicating the shielded beam and the shielding time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. Then, when the report returned from the touch panel controller 99 indicates that there are two or more continuous beams that have been shielded for 10 seconds or longer, the sub CPU 91a causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display Please display "and notify the user to remove the object on the touch panel.

  As described above, when there are two or more continuous beams that are shielded for a certain period of time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b, that is, when there is a possibility that an object is located on the touch panel, Since the notification that prompts the removal is performed, it is possible to detect and eliminate a defective beam at an early stage due to the presence of these objects.

  In addition, since the notification that prompts the removal of the object is performed at an earlier stage than the time until the beam coordinates associated with the defective beam are invalidated, the cause of the defective beam can be removed before the beam coordinates are invalidated. It becomes possible.

  It should be noted that the sub CPU 91a notifies the user that the object is to be removed, and then returns a report indicating that there are no two or more consecutive beams that are shielded for 10 seconds or more, that is, the object. Is removed and the defective beam is eliminated, or when a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed, that is, when an object is left on or the light receiving devices 57a and 57b and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are damaged. In this case, the notification is stopped.

  The effect control board 90 of the present embodiment can perform an operation test of each part mounted on the effect control board 90 by connecting a command simulator (test game control board) before shipment.

  In the operation test, an inspection command specifying a component to be operated by the command simulator and its operation mode is transmitted.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with LED, lamp, cold-cathode tube and other electrical components, a speaker, a liquid crystal display 51, and a touch panel controlled by the sub-control unit 91. An output port and its output port It is possible to inspect the operation of the designated part by designating the part corresponding to 1 and its operation mode by the inspection command. The inspection command is composed of 2 bytes. The output port is designated by the first byte, and the component to be operated and the operation mode are designated by the second byte.

  In the inspection command that inspects the operation of the lighting component, you can specify lighting and extinguishing as the operation mode, and if the lighting component can turn on multiple colors, you can also specify the lighting color It is.

  In the inspection command to inspect the operation of the speaker, as the operation mode, the output from both left and right only, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the sound ROM (ROM that stores sound data output from the speaker) Can be specified.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the operation mode includes color bar display, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, electrostatic test screen display, CGROM (liquid crystal display 51 ROM check of image data (CG data to be displayed on CG), display area check of liquid crystal display 51, display of image data A to D stored in CGROM, and check of VRAM. Is possible.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, it is possible to specify a defective beam check of the touch panel and an operation check of the touch panel as operation modes. When a touch panel defect check is designated, the voice ROM and CGROM ROM checks are also designated at the same time.

  As another inspection command, there is an inspection command for confirming the backup of the bonus medium effect. In this inspection command, the display of the bonus medium screen, the operation of the electrical components in the bonus, and the BGM output in the bonus are designated.

  In one inspection command, it is possible to specify only one output port, components corresponding to the output port, and operation modes, and when different components of the output port are operated simultaneously and inspected, Send inspection commands with specified ports continuously. For this reason, it is necessary to transmit 40 inspection commands continuously even if only the test for operating all the electrical parts is performed, and the operation of parts other than the electrical parts is also tested at the same time. In some cases, it is necessary to continuously transmit a maximum of 128 inspection commands according to the combination.

  Note that in the command simulator, an inspection command for designating the operation of a plurality of illumination parts, an examination command for designating the operation of the illumination parts, an inspection command for designating the operation of the speaker, and an inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 The inspection command for designating the operation of the speaker and the inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 can be transmitted simultaneously, but the liquid crystal display 51 different from the inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 can be transmitted. It is not possible to simultaneously transmit operation commands that specify operations that cannot be performed simultaneously, such as inspection commands that specify the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 and inspection commands that specify the operation of the touch panel. It has become.

  As described above, if an operation associated with a normal game is being performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is the next command even if commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. Since it is read by the timer interrupt process (sub) before reception, a plurality of unprocessed commands will not be stored in the reception buffer. Since there is a possibility of transmission, an area capable of storing 128 commands is provided in the reception buffer of the RAM 91c.

  The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer in the timer interrupt process (sub). The read command is read out, and it is determined whether or not the read command is an inspection command. As a result, when the read command is an inspection command, the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode are specified, and the specified component is operated in the specified operation mode. As a result, the operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the command simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  When the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the electrical component, the sub CPU 91a identifies the electrical component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode such as lighting, extinction, and lighting color, and designates the corresponding electrical component. It is made to operate in the operated mode.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the speaker, the operation designated by the inspection command such as output from both the left only, the right only from both left and right, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the audio ROM The mode is specified, and the speaker is operated in the specified operation mode. In particular, when the ROM check of the voice ROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the voice ROM is compared with the stored data stored in the ROM 91b, and the result of whether or not they match is determined. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the color bar display, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, electrostatic test screen is displayed. The operation mode specified by the inspection command, such as the ROM check of the CGROM, the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the image data A to D stored in the CGROM, the check of the VRAM, is specified, and the liquid crystal display 51 is specified. It operates in the mode of operation. In particular, when the ROM check of the CGROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the CGROM is compared with the stored data stored in the ROM 91b as in the case of the ROM check of the voice ROM. The result of whether or not to do so is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51 is designated, an image showing the displayable area is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the VRAM check is designated, the VRAM is expanded in the memory area and an image for VRAM check is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, the sub CPU 91a specifies an operation mode designated by the inspection command, such as a check for a defective beam on the touch panel, an operation check on the touch panel, and the touch panel and the liquid crystal display 51. Operate in the specified operation mode. In particular, when a check for a defective beam on the touch panel is designated, a defective beam analysis request command is transmitted to the touch panel controller 99, and whether there is a beam that is blocked for 60 seconds or more based on the returned report. If there is a beam that is shielded for 60 seconds or longer, a red line is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in correspondence with the shielded beam. In addition, when the check of the defective beam of the touch panel is designated, the voice ROM and the CGROM are also checked. In addition, there are two types of touch panel operation checks. When operation check 1 is specified, the touch panel is fully activated, a ticker “Please touch” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and a touch operation is detected. The reception of a new command is prohibited until it is done. When the operation check 2 is designated, the entire touch panel is enabled, a screen divided into 64 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the color of the frame where the touch operation is detected is changed. Also in this case, reception of a new command is prohibited until a touch operation is detected.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives the inspection command for inspecting the backup of the bonus medium effect, the sub CPU 91a specifies the component and the operation mode specified by the inspection command, and the operation in which the liquid crystal display 51, the speaker, and the electrical component are specified. Operate in a manner.

  As described above, the sub CPU 91a identifies the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode based on the reception of the inspection command, and operates the specified component in the specified operation mode. The operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  In general, the effect control means has the same number of reception buffers as the transmission buffers of the game control means, and the number of transmission buffers and the number of reception buffers are such that there is no overflow in the case of a normal game. Therefore, as long as the game is played normally, more commands than the reception buffer are not transmitted continuously, and the command transmitted from the game control means overflows. There is no. However, in the operation test for inspecting whether or not the production control means operates normally during development or before shipment as described above, a large number of commands are connected by connecting the test game control means to the production control means. It is possible to increase the efficiency of the operation test by continuously transmitting the message, but if the number of reception buffers is the same as the number of transmission buffers as described above, a large number of commands are transmitted during the operation test. There is a possibility that the reception buffer overflows and the operation test cannot be performed accurately. For this reason, it is necessary to increase the number of commands or transmission intervals that are continuously transmitted during the operation test, and as a result, there arises a problem that the efficiency of the operation test cannot be sufficiently increased.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the command that the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 is stored in the reception buffer that stores the command received by the sub control unit 91 from the main control unit 41. A storage area capable of storing a larger number of commands than the command storage area of the command transmission buffer is provided. Accordingly, when an operation test board such as a command simulator is connected to the effect control board 90 and an operation test is performed, the number of inspection commands that can be transmitted at one time and the transmission interval can be transmitted even when the inspection commands are continuously transmitted. However, the number of storage areas of the normal command transmission buffer provided in the main control unit 41, that is, the number of storage areas allocated as many as possible so as not to overflow assuming a normal game (16 commands in this embodiment) The number of test commands can be continuously transmitted up to the limit of the receiving buffer storage area (128 commands in this embodiment) without being limited according to the efficiency of the operation test. Can be effectively increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, for each inspection command, a plurality of lighting parts, a liquid crystal display 51, a production part such as a touch panel can be individually designated and an operation test can be performed. By transmitting an inspection command for designating each production component such as a certain electrical decoration component, the liquid crystal display 51, and the touch panel, it is possible to accurately inspect whether or not each production component operates normally.

  In the present embodiment, when an operation test is performed in the slot machine 1, it is possible to specify only one output port, a production component corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode thereof with one inspection command. For this reason, a storage area that can store a larger number of commands based on the number of output ports is provided in the storage area of the reception buffer, and operation tests of all the production parts are performed collectively. In this case, even when the inspection commands corresponding to the respective output ports are continuously transmitted, the reception buffer does not overflow, so that the operation test can be performed more efficiently.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to specify only one output port, a production component corresponding to the output port and its operation mode with one inspection command, but with one inspection command, It may be possible to specify only one production component and its operation correspondence. In this case, by providing a storage area capable of storing a larger number of commands than the number of production components in the reception buffer, When performing production component operation tests in a batch, even if inspection commands corresponding to each production component are sent continuously, the reception buffer does not overflow, so the operation test is more efficient. It can be performed.

  In the gaming machine in which the production control means controls the production according to the operation of the production operation means such as a touch panel as in this embodiment, it is necessary to inspect the detection status of the operation of the production operation means. If the next inspection command is mistakenly transmitted before the operation is detected, the next inspection command is received without waiting for the detection of the operation of the operation means for production, and the next operation test is performed. There is a problem that the detection of the operation detection status of the operation means for production cannot be normally performed.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91a of this embodiment receives an inspection command for designating an operation check of the touch panel and performs an operation check of the touch panel, the command reception interrupt process is performed until a touch operation is detected. During this period, new commands are not received, and even if new commands are transmitted during this period, new commands are not detected until the touch operation is detected and the operation check is completed. It is not received and processing based on the command is not performed. For this reason, even when an inspection command is erroneously transmitted without waiting for the completion of the operation check of the touch panel, the operation check of the touch panel can be normally performed.

  The sub CPU 91a not only prohibits command reception interrupt processing but also stores it in the reception buffer until a touch operation is detected after receiving the inspection command designating the touch panel operation check. Even if the command is already received and the received command is stored in the reception buffer, the touch operation is detected and the operation check is completed. The processing based on the command stored in the reception buffer is not performed. For this reason, even when another inspection command is transmitted continuously with the inspection command designating the operation check of the touch panel, the operation check of the touch panel can be normally performed.

  In this embodiment, the touch panel is applied as the production operation means. However, production operation means other than the touch panel, such as buttons and dials, may be applied, and operation checks other than the production operation means other than the touch panel may be performed. Even in the case of performing the operation check, even if the inspection command is erroneously transmitted without waiting for the completion of the operation check by prohibiting the reception of the command until the operation of the production operation means is detected in the same manner as described above. The inspection can be performed normally, and the command stored in the reception buffer is not read out until the operation of the rendering operation means is detected, so that another inspection command specifying the operation check is continuously performed. Even when the inspection command is transmitted, the operation check can be normally performed.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, as will be described later, as a gaming state, a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB), a challenge time (hereinafter referred to as CT), a normal gaming state, RT (1) (replay time (1)), There are RT (2) (replay time (2)), RT (3) (replay time (3)), RT (4) (replay time (4)), and the specified number of bets corresponding to RB and CT 1 is defined, and 3 is defined as the specified number of bets corresponding to the normal gaming state, RT (1) to (4). For this reason, when the gaming state is RB or CT, it is possible to start the game when the bet number is set to 1, and the gaming state is one of the normal gaming state, RT (1) to (4). In some cases, the game can be started when 3 is set as the number of bets. In the present embodiment, when a specified number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set, all the winning lines L1 to L5 are activated, and the specified number corresponding to the gaming state is set. If 1 (RB, CT), all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated when 1 is set as the bet number, and the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state is 3 (normal gaming state, RT (1) (4)), all pay lines L1 to L5 are activated when 3 is set as the bet number.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line (in the present embodiment, all the pay lines are always enabled. The activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line), and a winning combination is obtained when a combination of symbols called a combination is arranged on the winning line. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition of the game state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c. When the gaming state is CT, the winning flags of all the small roles are always set in the RAM 41c regardless of the result of the internal lottery, so that the small role can be won regardless of the result of the internal lottery. Is possible. Even if the gaming state is CT, in order for a re-gamer winning to occur, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the re-gamer winning flag in the RAM 41c in the same manner as other game states. is there.

  Among these winning flags, the winning flags for the small role and the replaying role are valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and are invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of combinations permitted by the flag is complete, and it is invalid in a game having the combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the winning flag for a special role is won, even if the combination of characters allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and carried over to the next game. It becomes. Of the special roles, BB (2) and BB (3), which will be described later, are always won in the winning game, and are not carried over after the next game.

  As the role in the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 15, the special bonus includes big bonuses (1) to (3) (hereinafter, the big bonus is BB), and the challenge bonus (hereinafter, the challenge bonus is CB). ) Is a small part, watermelon, 1 black cherry, net cherry, white cherry, bell, 15 (1), 15 (2), 15 (3), 15 (4) Replay (1) and Replay (2) are defined as follows.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the role to be selected by lottery depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1) to RT (4), RB, or CT. The combination of roles is different. Furthermore, the lottery depends on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (3), RT (2) other than carrying over, RT (4), RT (2) carrying over. Target combination and combination of combinations are different.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1) to RT (3), and no special role is carried over (the normal gaming state, RT (1) ( 3) When the special role is won, the game moves to RT (4). Therefore, in the normal gaming state (the special role is not carried over in RT (1) (3)), BB (1) to (3), CB , BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + black cherry, BB (1) + net cherry, BB (1) + white cherry, replay (1), Replay (2), Watermelon, Watermelon + 1, Bell, 15 (1) + Black Cherry, 15 (2) + Net Cherry, 15 (3) + White Cherry, 15 (4) Be eligible for internal lottery.

  In addition, the gaming state is RT (4) or RT (2), and any special combination is carried over (when the special combination is won in the normal gaming state, as described later, or RT (1), When a special role is won at RT (3), it will be transferred to RT (4) when a special role is won at the end of RT (2), so the special role is always carried over at RT (4). Replay (1), replay (2), watermelon, watermelon +1, bell, 15 (1) + black cherry, 15 (2) + net cherry, 15 (3) + white cherry, 15 Sheet (4) is the subject of internal lottery. In addition, when the game state is RB, watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, bell, 15 sheets (1) + black cherry, 15 sheets (2) + net cherry, 15 sheets (3) + white cherry, 15 sheets (4) are inside Eligible for lottery. In CT, replay (1) and replay (2) are targeted for internal lottery.

  Black Cherry is awarded when the symbol “Black Cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out in gaming states other than RB and CT. In the RB and CT, 7 medals are paid out. Net Cherry wins when the “Net Cherry” symbol is derived on any of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out in gaming states other than RB and CT In the RB and CT, 7 medals are paid out. The white cherry is awarded when the symbol “white cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out in gaming states other than RB and CT. In the RB and CT, 7 medals are paid out. In addition, when the symbol “black cherry”, “net cherry” or “white cherry” stops at the upper or lower stage of the left reel, the two winning lines L2 and L4 or the winning lines L3 and L5 are displayed. A combination of black cherries, net cherries or white cherries will be prepared, and black cherries, net cherries or white cherries will be won on the two winning lines, so there will be two cards in the gaming state other than RB and CT. Medals are paid out, and 14 medals are paid out in RB and CT.

  A watermelon is awarded when a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is arranged on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out. One is awarded when the combination of “Black 7-Black Cherry-Black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and one medal is awarded in gaming states other than RB and CT In the RB and CT, 15 medals are paid out. The bell is awarded when a combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out. Fifteen (1) wins when the combination of “Black 7-Bell-Bell” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out. Fifteen (2) wins when a combination of “net 7-bell-bell” is arranged on any of the winning lines in any game state, and 15 medals are paid out. Fifteen (3) wins when a combination of “Black 7-Bell-Bell” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out. Fifteen cards (4) are awarded when the combination of “bell-bell-replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out.

  Replay (1) is awarded when a combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB. Replay (2) is awarded when a combination of “bell-replay-replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB. When replay (1) or replay (2) wins, there is no payout of medals, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again. This is substantially the same as paying out 3 medals (1 in CT).

  BB has a combination of “Black 7-Black 7-Black 7”, “Bell-Replay-Bell”, and “Replay-Bell-Bell” in any of the winning lines in gaming states other than RB and CT. Wins when they are ready. In this embodiment, BB (1) is awarded when the combination of “Black 7-Black 7-Black 7” is aligned, and BB is awarded when the combination of “Bell-Replay-Bell” is aligned. Is BB (2), and BB that is awarded when the combination of “Replay-Bell-Bell” is complete is BB (3).

  When BB (1) wins, the gaming state shifts to BB (1), when BB (2) wins, the gaming state shifts to BB (2), and when BB (3) wins, the gaming state changes to BB. Move to (3). When transitioning to BB (1) to (3), transition to RB is performed simultaneously with transition to BB (1) to (3). RB is more useful to players than the normal gaming state due to the increased winning probability of small roles, especially bells, 15 (1) + black cherry, 15 (2) + net cherries, 15 (3) + white cherries. This is an advantageous gaming state, and after RB starts, when 12 games are consumed or when 8 games are won (any kind of combination is possible), whichever comes first. If BB (1) to (3) has not ended when RB ends, the process proceeds to RB again, and is controlled to RB repeatedly until BB (1) to (3) ends. That is, during BB (1) to (3), control is always performed to RB.

  Then, BB (1) ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the BB (1) exceeds 403, and BB (2) returns to the player in the BB (2). The process ends when the total number of medals paid out exceeds 300, and BB (3) ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the BB (3) exceeds 100. At the end of the BB, the RB is also ended regardless of whether or not the RB end condition is satisfied.

  A CB is awarded when a combination of “black 7-black 7-white 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB and CT. When CB wins, the gaming state shifts to CB and simultaneously shifts to CT. In CT, although a drawing range of symbols is limited as compared with the normal gaming state on a predetermined specific reel (right reel in this embodiment), winning of all small roles is permitted and winning a small role. This is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and is completed in one game. If the CB is not finished when the CT is finished, the process proceeds to the CT again, and the CT is repeatedly controlled until the CB is finished. That is, during CB, it is always controlled to CT. The CB ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the CB (excluding the number of medals substantially granted by the re-gamer) exceeds 149.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 16383) is acquired as described later. And, for each combination and combination of combinations determined according to the gaming state, according to the acquired random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values of each combination of combination and combination determined according to the gaming state and setting value Done. In this embodiment, based on the number of judgment values for each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination, and a range of determination values for the combination of general combination and special combination is won. And the winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general combination and a special combination may be won simultaneously in one game. However, for special roles of different types, the range of determination values to be won in duplicate is not specified, and special types of different types are exclusively drawn.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1) to RT (3), and no special role is carried over, BB (1) to (3), CB, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + black cherry, BB (1) + net cherry, BB (1) + white cherry, replay (1), replay (2), Watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, bell, 15 sheets (1) + black cherry, 15 sheets (2) + net cherry, 15 sheets (3) + white cherry, 15 sheets (4) are sequentially read out as the target roles for internal lottery .

  When the gaming state is RT (4) or RT (2) and any special role is carried over, replay (1), replay (2), watermelon, watermelon +1, bell, 15 (1 ) + Black cherry, 15 sheets (2) + net cherry, 15 sheets (3) + white cherry, and 15 sheets (4) are sequentially read out as the subject combination of the internal lottery.

  When the game state is RB, watermelon, watermelon +1, bell, 15 (1) + black cherry, 15 (2) + net cherry, 15 (3) + white cherry, 15 (4) are internal lottery It is sequentially read out as a target combination. When the gaming state is CT, the replay (1) and the replay (2) are sequentially read out as a target combination for internal lottery.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles that are the subject of the internal lottery and the current gaming state are sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery, and when the result of the addition overflows, Or it is determined that the combination of the winning combination is won.

  When a winning combination of any combination or combination is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the combination of combination or combination determined to be won is set in the internal winning flag storage work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the winning flag for the special role is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. In addition, when a special role + a general role is elected, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is elected is set in the special role storing work, and the general role is elected indicating that the general role is elected. Set the flag in the general role storage work. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination is selected, only the general winning combination work is cleared. If the gaming state is CT, a winning flag indicating that all small roles have been won is set in the general role storing work regardless of whether any winning combination has been won.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.

  The main CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the rotation of the reel starts and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the slip of the referred stop control table is referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Even if the winning status of the combination is different, the same control is applied (for example, the same control is applied when BB (1) + replay (1) is won and when CB + replay (1) is won) In such a case, the same address is stored as the index data. In such a case, the stop control table is created by referring to the same table creation data.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of sliding frames according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the reel stop status and the stopped position of the stopped reel are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. In this embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 16 steps (number of steps in which one symbol moves) are defined for one reel, and these areas are areas 1 to 21 from the reel reference position. A number is assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 1 to 21 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 1 to 21 are assigned to symbols. , Area numbers 1 to 21 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of sliding symbols for each area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of sliding symbols for each area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3). Sliding frame when an operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected at a timing (a timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number). It is a table with each number set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the table creation data, and the stop control table address of the unreacted reel corresponding to the stopped reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described. When one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop operation position area is determined based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. The number is specified, the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected is referred, and the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired sliding frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of sliding frames to the stop is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of sliding frames from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 It will stop in the lower symbol area).

  In the table index of this embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and further, one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). In other words, table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and stop control tables corresponding to reel stop states (and stopped positions of stopped reels) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  In this embodiment, the stop control table used for the gaming state other than CT and the reels other than the right reel during CT has a value of 0 to 4 as the number of sliding symbols, and detects the stop operation. It is possible to stop the reel by drawing a maximum of 4 frame symbols from. That is, in a gaming state other than CT and a reel other than the right reel during CT, a symbol stop position can be designated from a range of a maximum of five frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, the stop control table used for the right reel during CT has a value of 0 or 1 as the number of sliding frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of one frame symbol after detecting the stop operation. Is possible. That is, on the right reel during CT, the symbol stop position can be designated from a range of a maximum of two frames including the stop operation position at which the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame in order to move the reel for one symbol, in a gaming state other than CT and for reels other than the right reel during CT, a maximum of four symbols are drawn after the stop operation is detected. The reel can be stopped, and the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of up to 5 symbols including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In the right reel during CT, the stop operation is detected. The reel can be stopped by drawing in a maximum of one symbol, and the stop position of the symbol can be designated from the range of a maximum of two symbols including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected.

  In this embodiment, if any of the winning combinations is won in a gaming state other than CT, when the stop operation is performed, the winning combination in the drawing range of up to four frames on the winning line is displayed. If they can be stopped together, control is performed to stop them evenly, and a winning combination that is not won will be controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  If a special role is elected while a special role has been carried over from before the previous game in a game state other than CT, or if a special role and a small role are newly won at the same time, the special role and the small role are won simultaneously. (BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + bell, etc.), when a stop operation is performed, arrange special roles that are elected in the draw range of up to 4 frames on the winning line If it can be stopped, it will be controlled to stop them together, and if the special combination elected in the maximum 4 frames drawing range cannot be drawn on the winning line, the maximum 4 frames on the winning line will be drawn. If it is possible to align and stop the small roles that have been won in the drawing range, control is performed to align and stop them, and control that is not selected is controlled to be stopped in the pull-in range of 4 frames. It will be. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special combination on the winning line over the small combination, and the small combination can be won only when the special combination cannot be drawn. When a special combination and a small combination can be drawn at the same time, only the special combination is drawn, and the small combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the special combination.

  When a special combination and a re-playing role are won at the same time, such as when a re-playing role is won in a state other than the CT where the special role has been carried over before the previous game (BB (1) + replay (1 ), Etc.), when a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to four frames. As will be described later, “replay” and “bell”, which are symbols constituting the re-gamer, are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less, that is, 4 frames or less, for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. In addition, since it can be stopped at any position within the pull-in range of 4 frames, if the special player is carried over from before the previous game, the stop switch 8L by the player, Regardless of the operation timing of 8C and 8R, the re-game players will always win together. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win. In the case where the special combination and the re-playing combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the re-playing combination is drawn in, and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the re-playing combination.

  When multiple types of small roles are won at the same time in a gaming state other than CT (such as +1 watermelon), when a stop operation is performed, a winning range of up to 4 frames will be won on the winning line. If you can stop all of the selected small roles with a large number of payouts, they will be controlled to stop them, and out of the selected small roles with a maximum of 4 draws on the winning line. If you cannot pull in a small role with a large number of payouts, if you can stop a small role with a small number of payouts on the winning line with a maximum of 4 draws, Control to be stopped is performed, and the winning combination that is not won is controlled to be stopped in the pull-in range of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control of aligning small roles with a large number of payouts on the winning line over small roles with a small number of payouts. It becomes possible to win a few small roles. When a plurality of types of small combinations with different payout numbers can be drawn at the same time, only a small combination with a large number of payouts is drawn, and a plurality of types of small combinations are not aligned on the winning line at the same time.

  When a special role has been carried over from before the previous game in a game state other than CT, multiple types of small roles are won, or special roles and multiple types of small roles are won simultaneously. If a small role is elected at the same time (BB (1) + watermelon + 1 piece, etc.), when a stop operation is performed, a special role that is elected within a maximum draw range of 4 frames on the winning line is selected. If they can be stopped together, control is performed to stop them evenly. If the special combination elected in the maximum 4 frames drawing range cannot be drawn on the winning line, a maximum of 4 can be drawn on the winning line. If you can stop with a combination of small payouts with a large number of payouts out of the winning combinations in the draw range, you will be controlled to stop them together and win in the draw range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. A small role elected as a special role If you can not pull in a small role with a large number of payouts, if you can stop a small role with a small number of payouts on the winning line within a maximum of 4 draws, align them. Control to stop is performed, and a winning combination that has not been won is controlled to be stopped in the drawing range of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special role on the winning line over the small role, and it becomes possible to win the small role only when the special role cannot be withdrawn. Priority is given to the control of aligning small roles with a large number of payouts on the winning line over small roles with a small number of payouts. It is possible to win a prize. In the case where a special role and a small role can be withdrawn at the same time, only the special role is withdrawn and the special role and the small role are not aligned on the winning line. In this case, only a small combination with a large number of payouts is drawn in, and a plurality of types of small combinations are not arranged on the winning line at the same time.

  If the re-game combination is not elected in CT, for the left and middle reels, the small combination with the largest number of payouts (15 small combinations) is stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 frames. If possible, stop control is performed to align them, and re-playing and special roles are controlled to be stopped within a maximum of 4 frames. On the other hand, for the right reel, if it is possible to stop by aligning the small payout with the largest number of payouts (15 small wins) in the drawing range of up to one frame on the winning line, stop control is performed to align them and replay The combination and special combination are controlled so as to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of one frame.

  If the re-gamer is elected in CT, for the left and middle reels, if the re-gamer who has been elected can be stopped on the winning line with a maximum draw of 4 frames, it will be stopped. Control is performed, and the special role is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. On the other hand, for the right reel, if it is possible to stop the re-playing players who have been elected within the drawing range of a maximum of one frame on the winning line and stop them, the special role will be controlled to a maximum of one frame. The control to stop in the middle is performed. In addition, as a stop position within the pull-in range, a stop position where both the constituent symbol of the small part and the constituent symbol of the re-gamer stop on the winning line, and a stop where only the constituent symbol of the re-gamer stops on the winning line If there is a position, control is performed so as to preferentially draw a stop position where both the constituent symbol of the small part and the constituent symbol of the re-gamer stop on the winning line. On the other hand, even if there is a stop position on the winning line where both the small role component symbol and the re-playing component symbol stop as the stop position within the pull-in range, In the case where the re-gamer has won a prize, control is performed so that the position where only the re-game player's constituent symbols stop on the winning line is controlled, and only the re-game player's constituent symbols win. If there is no stop position on the line, control is performed to preferentially draw the stop position where only the small symbol component symbols stop on the winning line.

  As in this example, when a special role and a small role are won at the same time, a stop operation is made at the timing at which the drawing pattern of the selected special role and the constituent symbol of the selected small role overlap In addition, in the case of controlling the drawing of the special role composition in preference to the small role drawing, the special role drawing is not drawn, but the small role drawing is drawn, and the small role wins. In this case, there is a problem that the winning of a special role that can be won simultaneously is denied, and even if a small role that has the possibility of winning simultaneously is won, the winning of a special role cannot be expected. On the other hand, if a special role and a small role are elected at the same time, the constituent symbol of the special role will be drawn in preference to the constituent symbol of the small role, and the selected small role will be missed, which is disadvantageous to the player. There is a problem that will occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, for the left and middle reels, the "watermelon" symbol constituting the watermelon stops on one of the winning lines, and CB, BB (1) The “Black 7” design that makes up the display stops on any of the pay lines, and the maximum draw-in range is over 4 frames, and the “Watermelon” design and the “Black 7” design are simultaneously displayed. The array has no stop operation positions that can be aimed at. Further, for the right reel, a display mode in which the “watermelon” symbol constituting the watermelon stops on any winning line, and a display mode in which the “white 7” symbol constituting the CB stops on any winning line, The display mode in which the “Black 7” symbol constituting BB (1) stops on any of the winning lines is arranged beyond the maximum draw range of 4 frames, the “Watermelon” symbol and the “White 7” The stop operation position for simultaneously aiming at the symbol and the stop operation position for simultaneously aiming at the “watermelon” symbol and the “black 7” symbol do not exist.

  In the internal lottery, CB + BB, BB (1) + watermelon, that is, CB or BB (1) that does not have a stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time, and watermelon can be won simultaneously. Even if a watermelon that may win at the same time wins, the winning of CB or BB (1) will not be denied, and when a watermelon that may win at the same time wins, CB or BB The expectation for the winning of (1) can be surely increased. In addition, even if CB or BB (1) and watermelon are won simultaneously, the winning watermelon will be lost due to the fact that the CB and BB (1) symbols are drawn in preference to the watermelon components. However, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the simultaneous winning of CB or BB (1) and watermelon.

  On the left, a display mode in which the “black cherry” symbol constituting the black cherry stops on any winning line, and the “black 7” symbol constituting the BB (1) stops on any winning line The display mode is arranged over the maximum drawing range of 4 frames, and there is no stop operation position that can simultaneously aim for the “black cherry” symbol and the “black 7” symbol, and the internal lottery BB (1) + black cherry, that is, BB (1) and black cherry that do not have a stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time can be won at the same time, so black that may be won at the same time as BB (1) Even if a cherry wins, the winning of BB (1) will not be denied, and when a black cherry that may win at the same time wins, the period for winning of BB (1) It is possible to increase the feeling surely. Furthermore, even if BB (1) and black cherry are selected at the same time, it is not possible to miss the winning black cherry because the BB (1) symbol is drawn in preference to the black cherry symbol. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the simultaneous winning of BB (1) and black cherry.

  On the other hand, in the internal lottery, CB or BB (1) and one can be won at the same time. For all reels, the symbols constituting one sheet ("black 7" for the left and right reels, " A display mode in which the “black cherry” symbol) stops on one of the winning lines, and “white 7” for the symbols constituting the CB and BB (1) (“black 7” symbol for the left and middle reels, and CB for the right reel) 7 ”symbol, in the case of BB (1)“ black 7 ”symbol) is displayed within one of the winning lines, and is arranged within 4 frames, which is the maximum drawing range, constitutes one piece There is a stop operation position at which the symbols that make up and the symbols that make up CB and BB (1) can be aimed at the same time.

  However, in this embodiment, one card is always selected at the same time as the watermelon, and for all reels, the "watermelon" symbol that constitutes the watermelon and the symbols that constitute CB and BB (1) are on any winning line. "Watermelon" design that constitutes a watermelon, with the display mode that stops in one, the display mode that the symbols that make up one piece stop on any of the winning lines, and the maximum draw-in range of 4 frames And the symbols that make up CB and BB (1) are arranged so that there is no stop operation position that can simultaneously aim at the symbols that make up one piece, and the stop operation is aimed at the “watermelon” symbols that make up the watermelon. Expected payout value (watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet) winning probability combined with the number of watermelon payouts 1), the payout expected value (watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet winning probability) when the stop operation is performed aiming at the symbols constituting one sheet and 1 If the stop operation is aimed at the "watermelon" symbol that constitutes the watermelon, the symbol that constitutes CB, BB (1) constitutes one symbol. You can earn more medals than if you stop the game to aim for a symbol. As a result, the stop operation aiming at the “watermelon” symbol that constitutes the watermelon, that is, the symbol that constitutes one of the display modes in which the symbol that constitutes CB, BB (1) stops on any winning line The display mode that stops on the winning line can also be prompted to stop at a timing that does not stop, and the CB and BB (1) constituent symbols are not drawn, but one constituent symbol is drawn. Since winning of CB and BB (1) that may be won at the same time when a prize is won can be prevented from being denied, a special role can be won by winning a small role that may win at the same time. Can be avoided.

  Also, BB (1), net cherry, and white cherry can be won simultaneously, and for the left reel, the “net cherry” symbol that constitutes the net cherry stops on one of the winning lines. The display mode in which the “white cherry” symbols that make up stop on any of the winning lines and the display mode in which the “black 7” symbols that make up BB (1) stop on any of the winning lines Arranged within the range of 4 frames, there is a stop operation position where the symbols constituting the net cherry and the white cherry and the symbols constituting the BB (1) can be aimed simultaneously.

  However, in this embodiment, for the left reel, the “net cherry” symbol constituting the net cherry stops on one of the winning lines and the “watermelon” symbol constituting the watermelon is on any of the winning lines. Stop operation position that can aim at the display mode to stop at the same time, the display mode in which the "white cherry" symbol that constitutes the white cherry stops on any winning line and the "watermelon" symbol that constitutes the watermelon on any winning line The stop operation position at which the display mode to be stopped at the same time can be simultaneously displayed, the display mode in which the “net cherry” symbol constituting the net cherry stops on any winning line, and the “black 7” symbol constituting BB (1) Stop operation position that can simultaneously aim at the display mode that stops on any winning line, the “white cherry” pattern that makes up the white cherry is on any winning line "Net cherry" that does not overlap the display mode to stop and the stop operation position at which the "black 7" symbol constituting the watermelon can simultaneously aim on any winning line, and further constitutes net cherry Expected payout value when the stop operation is performed simultaneously aiming at the “watermelon” symbol that constitutes the symbol and watermelon (watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + Watermelon + 1 value winning probability combined value and watermelon payout number, net cherry, BB (1) + net cherry winning probability sum value and net cherry payout number (Be sure to stop at the top or bottom) In effect, when the stop operation is performed simultaneously aiming at the “white cherry” symbol that constitutes the white cherry and the “watermelon” symbol that constitutes the watermelon. Expected value (watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB) + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + total value of winning probability multiplied by watermelon payout number And the sum of white cherry, BB (1) + white cherry winning probability and the number of white cherries paid out (substantially two to stop at the top or bottom) Is the expected payout value (net cherry, BB (1) + net cherry) when the stop operation is performed simultaneously aiming at the “net cherry” symbol constituting the net cherry and the “black 7” symbol constituting BB (1). Of the winning probabilities and the number of net cherries paid out (a value that is essentially two to stop at the top or bottom), the “white cherry” symbol and BB (1) that make up the white cherry Stop aiming at the "Black 7" design The expected payout value when the stop operation is performed (white cherry, BB (1) + white cherry winning probability combined value and the number of white cherry payouts (substantially 2 to stop at the top or bottom)) The value was higher than (multiplied value), and the “net cherry” symbol constituting the net cherry or the “white cherry” symbol constituting the white cherry and the “watermelon” symbol constituting the watermelon were simultaneously aimed at stopping. There are more medals than a “net cherry” symbol that constitutes a net cherry or a “white cherry” symbol that constitutes a white cherry and a “black 7” symbol that constitutes a BB (1). Can be earned. As a result, the “net cherry” symbol constituting the net cherry or the “white cherry” symbol constituting the white cherry and the “watermelon” symbol constituting the watermelon are simultaneously stopped, that is, “black 7” constituting the BB (1). It becomes possible to prompt a stop operation at a timing when the display mode in which the symbol stops on any winning line does not stop, and net cherries or white cherries are pulled in without drawing in the constituent symbols of BB (1) It is possible to prevent the winning of BB (1), which may win simultaneously when net cherry or white cherry wins, so that a small role that can win simultaneously wins. You can avoid the problem that you won't be able to win a special role.

  Also, in this embodiment, black cherry, net cherry or white cherry is selected, reels other than the left reel are set as the first stop, and stop at the timing when the “watermelon” symbol can be drawn on any winning line. When an operation is performed, the “Watermelon” symbol is stopped on one of the winning lines, and the second stop is also other than the left reel, and the “Watermelon” symbol is displayed on the stopped reel. If a stop operation is performed at the timing of drawing on the stopped winning line, the “watermelon” symbol is stopped on the winning line, so that the “watermelon” Depending on whether or not the symbol stops on the winning line, it can be determined whether the watermelon has stopped, or whether black cherry, net cherry or white cherry has been won. Even in such a case, in the left reel, the “net cherry” symbol that constitutes the net cherry or the “white cherry” symbol that constitutes the white cherry and the “watermelon” symbol that constitutes the watermelon are stopped simultaneously. The operation, that is, the display operation in which the “black 7” symbols constituting the BB (1) are stopped on any winning line can be urged to stop the operation at a timing at which the BB (1) does not stop. It is possible to effectively prevent BB (1) winning that may be won simultaneously when net cherries or white cherries are pulled in without drawing the constituent symbol and net cherries or white cherries win. .

  In the conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when the small combination is selected independently and the reel stop control pattern used when the small combination and special combination are simultaneously selected are different from each other. Although the winning of the special role can be determined accordingly, it did not suggest any information other than the winning of the special role depending on the stop mode of the reel. In addition, in the conventional slot machine, since the stop mode at the time of winning a small role alone is different from the stop mode at the time of simultaneous winning of a small role and a special role, is the special role won according to the stop mode? If the player can determine whether or not he / she has not won the special role, there is a problem that the expectation is lost.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet are selected, and "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" combination When the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the winning line can be drawn into the winning line, control is performed to align the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” in the winning line, but watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + When the watermelon is won, among the stop operation positions where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is selected as the winning line L1, L2, When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be aligned only to L3 and a stop operation position that can be aligned to any of the pay lines L1 to L5. Can control the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" to the winning lines L1, L2, L3, and the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" can be aligned only to the winning lines L4, L5. Control is performed so that the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned with the winning lines L4, L5 only when the stopping operation is performed at the stopping operation position that cannot be aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, L3. Sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet is selected, the "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" combination among the stop operation positions where the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" can be drawn into the winning line -"Watermelon-Watermelon" combination can be made only to the winning lines L4, L5, the stop operation position and any of the winning lines L1-L5 When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be aligned, control is performed to align the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination with the winning lines L4 and L5, and the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination is awarded. It is possible to align only the lines L1, L2, and L3, and only when the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that cannot be aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5, the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is selected as the winning line L1, Control to align L2 and L3 is performed.

  That is, when a watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon is selected and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, “ Control to align the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” in preference to the winning lines L1, L2, L3 over the winning lines L4, L5. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is selected as the winning line L1, L2. , L3 is preferentially controlled to the winning lines L4 and L5.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 16A, when watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon is selected, the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is the winning line L1, L2, L3. In the case where watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, and BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet are selected, the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned on the winning lines L4 and L5. Probability is high. In other words, when watermelon wins when watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon is won, and when watermelon + 1, CB + watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 The winning line where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is easy to match is different from when the watermelon wins.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 16 (a) and (b)-(1), in the internal lottery, CB + occupies the total value (A + C + E) of the winning probability of watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon. CB + which occupies the combined value (B + D + F) of the winning probability of watermelon +1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet than the ratio of the combined value (A + C) of the winning probability of watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon Watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet winning probability (B + D) with the probability that the ratio of watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, watermelon +1 sheet, CB + watermelon +1 sheet, Lottery of BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet is performed.

  As a result, CB or BB (1), that is, when a watermelon and one piece are won at the same time, is won at the same time as CB or BB (1), that is, when a watermelon and one piece are won at the same time. Since the ratio will increase, the winning line for which the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is complete is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5. The player's expectation can be changed.

  Furthermore, there is a possibility that a special role will be won regardless of whether the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5. However, it is impossible to determine whether or not a special role has been won from a winning line that includes a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”. The combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” Regardless of which winning line is arranged, the player's expectation that the special role is won will not be lost.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B-2, in the internal lottery, BB (occupying the total value (A + C) of winning probability of CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon 1) + BB (1) + watermelon + 1 winning probability (B + D) of winning probability (B + D) of CB + watermelon + 1 and BB (1) + watermelon + 1 winning probability than the ratio of winning probability (C) of 1 + watermelon D) A lottery of CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, and BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet is performed at a probability that the ratio of D) becomes high.

  As a result, BB (1), that is, more medals than CB, is expected when one watermelon and one watermelon are won at the same time, compared to when one watermelon and one piece are won at the same time. Since the percentage of winning at the same time as the special role that can be done will increase, the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5 Depending on whether or not there is a change in the player's expectation for winning BB (1), which is more advantageous among CB and BB (1).

  Further, it is impossible to determine whether the CB is won or the BB (1) is won from the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”. Even if the combination of "" is aligned on any winning line, the player's expectation for winning of BB (1) having a higher advantage of CB and BB (1) is not impaired.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B- (3), in the internal lottery, watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 when the set value is 1 to 3. Of BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 winning probability (A1 + B1 + C1 + D1 + E1 + F1), and BB (1) + watermelon + 1 The winning probability of watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet when the set value is 4-6 rather than the ratio of the value (B1 + D1 + F1) Sum of winning probabilities (B2 + D2 + F) for watermelon + 1, CB + watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 in the total (A2 + B2 + C2 + D2 + E2 + F2) +1 sheet watermelon, watermelon in the ratio is higher probability of), CB + Watermelon, CB + +1 Like watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, we are doing the BB (1) + watermelon + 1 piece of lottery.

  Thereby, setting 4 to 6, that is, setting 1 to 3 is set as the setting value when the watermelon and one piece are won at the same time, compared to the case where the watermelon and one piece are won alone. Since the ratio of setting values that are more advantageous to the player than in the case where it is set is increased, the winning lines with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” are the winning lines L1, L2, and L3. Whether or not the set value is a set value advantageous to the player can be inferred based on whether or not the pay line is L4 or L5.

  Furthermore, it is impossible to determine whether the setting values 1 to 3 are set as the setting value or the settings 4 to 6 are set from the winning line in which the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is arranged. Regardless of the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” in any winning line, the player's sense of expectation that settings 4-6 having higher advantages among the settings 1-6 are set is impaired. There is no end.

  In this embodiment, the lottery of watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet is performed in the internal lottery, but CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet only, if watermelon and watermelon + 1 sheet wins, be sure to win simultaneously with CB or BB (1) Also good.

  In this embodiment, watermelon, watermelon + 1 and a plurality of types of special roles are won simultaneously, but only watermelon, watermelon + 1 and one type of special roles may be won simultaneously.

  In the present embodiment, BB (1) can obtain more medals out of CB and BB (1), but CB out of CB and BB (1) has more medals. It is good also as a structure which can acquire.

  In this embodiment, watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon are selected, and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line. The combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is easy to align with the winning lines L1, L2, L3, and watermelon + 1, CB + watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 are selected. -When the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of "watermelon-watermelon" can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is easily aligned with the winning lines L4, L5. , Watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon is won, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet is won It is sufficient that the winning lines that are easy to align differ according to the configuration, for example, it is easy to align with a specific winning line in one case, and easy to align with a winning line different from the specific winning line in the other case. Also good.

    In this embodiment, watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon are selected, and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line. In this case, control is performed so that the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, L3 at a higher rate than the winning lines L4, L5, and watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + Watermelon + 1 is selected, and when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination can be drawn into the winning line, the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination is selected. Control is performed to align with the winning lines L4, L5 at a higher rate than the winning lines L1, L2, L3, but watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1 + When a watermelon is selected and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” Control to align only L1, L2, L3, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet is selected, and draw the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” to the winning line When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “watermelon” can be performed, the control of aligning the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination only to the winning lines L4 and L5 may be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the internal lottery, the ratio of the combined value of the winning probability of CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon to the combined value of the winning probability of watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, and watermelon + 1 CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet winning probability of the combined value of CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet winning probability is a different probability Watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet lottery, watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon won If a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + switch +1 is selected, and control is performed so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned differs from when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line. By doing so, it is possible to change the player's expectation for winning the special role due to the difference in the winning line with the combination of `` watermelon-watermelon-watermelon ''. , CB + watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, CB + watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, the combined probability of winning probability, and watermelon + 1, CB + Watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon with a probability that the ratio of the combined value of the winning probability of CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon in the combined value of the winning probability of watermelon, B + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, watermelon + 1, CB + watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, lottery, watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon The combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is controlled so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned is different from when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination can be drawn into the winning line. The player's expectation for winning the special role may be changed depending on a winning line including a combination of “-watermelon-watermelon”.

  Also, in the internal lottery, the ratio of the combined value of the winning probability of CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 in the combined value of the winning probability of watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, and watermelon + 1 , CB + watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon +1 + BB (1) + watermelon winning probability of BB (1) + watermelon , BB (1) + watermelon, watermelon +1, CB + watermelon +1, BB (1) + watermelon +1, lottery, watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon +1 When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon are selected. By controlling so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned is different from when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of `` watermelon-watermelon-watermelon '' can be drawn into the winning line, The player's expectation for winning the special role may be changed depending on a winning line including a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”.

  Also, in the internal lottery, watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + CB + watermelon + 1 share of the combined value of watermelon winning probability, BB (1) + watermelon winning probability total value and watermelon + 1 sheet , CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + watermelon, CB + watermelon with a probability that the ratio of the combined value of the winning probability of CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 piece in the combined value of the winning probability , BB (1) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, lottery, watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet is won. By controlling so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned is different from when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of `` watermelon-watermelon-watermelon '' can be drawn into the winning line, The player's expectation for winning the special role may be changed depending on a winning line including a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”.

  In this embodiment, the ratio of winning probability of BB (1) + watermelon in the combined value of winning probability of CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon in the internal lottery, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + The ratio of BB (1) + watermelon + 1 winning probability to the combined value of the winning probability of watermelon + 1 is CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + Watermelon + 1 lottery, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon has been won, the stop operation is made at the stop operation position that can draw the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" into the winning line CB + watermelon + 1 and BB (1) + watermelon + 1 are selected, and the stop operation is possible at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line. CB and BB (1) are more advantageous due to the difference in the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” by controlling so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned differs between The player's expectation for winning BB (1) with a high value can be changed. However, in the internal lottery, the winning probability of CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 is added. The ratio of winning probability of BB (1) + watermelon + 1 occupies and the ratio of winning probability of BB (1) + watermelon occupying the combined value of winning probability of CB + watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet will be selected, and CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet will be selected. -Watermelon-Watermelon "combination when the stop operation is made at the stop operation position where the winning line can be drawn, and CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon is selected. The combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is controlled by controlling the winning line to be preferentially aligned between when the stop operation is made at the stop operation position where the "watermelon" combination can be drawn into the winning line. It may be possible to change the player's expectation level for winning BB (1), which has a higher advantage among CB and BB (1), depending on the difference in the winning line.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the internal lottery, watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet when the set value is 1 to 3. Watermelon + watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + when the set value is 4 to 6 than the ratio of the combined value of the winning probability of watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet in the combined value of winning probability Winning probability of watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, the sum of the winning probability of watermelon + 1, CB + watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 Watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet will be drawn at the probability that the combined value ratio will be high, watermelon, CB + watermelon , BB (1) + watermelon is elected, and when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 And BB (1) + watermelon + 1 is selected, and priority is given to the case where the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line. By controlling so that the winning lines to be aligned are different, it can be estimated whether or not the set value is advantageous to the player due to the difference in the winning line where the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination is aligned. However, in the internal lottery, watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon when the set value is 1 to 3, B (1) + Watermelon + 1 Watermelon, watermelon + 1 when the set value is 4-6 compared to the ratio of the combined value of the winning probability of watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon in the combined value of the winning probability CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + the combined value of the winning probability of watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon The ratio of watermelon, watermelon +1, CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon +1, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon +1 , BB (1) + watermelon + 1 is selected, and when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, watermelon, CB + Watermelon, BB (1) + Watermelon are selected, and when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, it is preferentially aligned. By controlling the winning line to be different, it is possible to infer whether or not the setting value is advantageous to the player based on the difference of the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”. Anyway.

  Further, when the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6, the watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 The set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6, which is the ratio of the sum of the winning probabilities of watermelon + 1, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon Watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 watermelon in the combined value of winning probability, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + Watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 lottery with the probability that the combined value of the winning probability of watermelon will be high, watermelon If CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet is selected and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, +1, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon are selected, and priority is given to when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" can be drawn into the winning line By controlling so that the winning line to be aligned is different, it is estimated whether or not the setting value is advantageous to the player by the difference of the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”. You may be able to.

  Further, when the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6, the watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 The set value is either 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6 than the ratio of the sum of the winning probabilities of watermelon + 1, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 in the sum of winning probabilities In the other case, watermelon + watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, BB ( 1) Watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet with the probability that the combined value of winning probability of + watermelon + 1 sheet will be higher Lottery Watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon is selected, and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line , Watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet is selected, and the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line Whether or not the set value is advantageous to the player due to the difference in the pay line with the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" It may be possible to guess.

  Further, when the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6, the watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 The set value is either 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6 than the ratio of the sum of the winning probabilities of watermelon +1, CB + watermelon +1, BB (1) + watermelon in the sum of winning probabilities Watermelon in the other case, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 watermelon occupying the combined value of winning probabilities + CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon winning probability is the ratio of the combined value of the winning probability of watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet Lottery Watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 is selected, and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line , Watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon is selected and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line Whether or not the set value is advantageous to the player due to the difference in the pay line with the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" It may be possible to guess.

  Also, in this embodiment, regardless of whether CB or BB (1) is won or not, the setting value is advantageous for the player due to the difference in the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”. In the internal lottery, CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1 ) + Watermelon + CB + watermelon, CB + watermelon when the set value is 4-6 rather than the ratio of the combined value of winning probability of CB + watermelon + 1 and BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet in the total value of winning probability +1, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + one winning probability of CB + watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon + one winning probability CB with probability Lottery of watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, and when the set value is 1 to 3, it occupies the total value of the winning probability of watermelon and watermelon + 1 sheet Watermelon +1 sheet winning probability ratio and watermelon, watermelon +1 sheet winning probability ratio of watermelon and watermelon +1 sheet winning probability when the set value is 4 to 6 , Watermelon + lottery, watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon has been won, stop operation at the stop operation position that can draw the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" into the winning line If you have made a watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet is selected, you can draw the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" to the winning line It is possible to control so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned differs between when the stop operation is performed at the active stop operation position, and by doing so, CB or BB (1) is won simultaneously. As a result, it is possible to infer whether or not the set value is a set value advantageous to the player based on the difference in the winning line including the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”.

  Also, in this embodiment, the winning line where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is easy to match is different between the case where the setting value is the setting 1 to 3 and the case where the setting is the setting 4 to 6. As long as at least one set value among a plurality of different set values and at least one other set value have different winning lines where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is easy to match.

  Further, in this embodiment, when CB or BB (1) is won, among the winning lines L1 to L5, BB (1) having higher advantage is won among CB and BB (1). If the setting 4-6, which is more advantageous among the settings 1-6, is set, the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination is easily displayed on the winning lines L4, L5. CB or BB (1) is more likely to be won by making the “watermelon-watermelon” combination easier to match, and BB (1), which has higher advantage among CB and BB (1), is won. This suggests that there is a high possibility that a setting value with a high degree of advantage is set, and when the watermelon wins, the player's response to being in an advantageous state Give your expectations sharpness However, when CB or BB (1) is elected, among the winning lines L1 to L5, BB (1) having higher advantage is elected among CB and BB (1). What is the winning line where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is easy to match in the case where at least one of the settings 1 to 6 or the settings 4 to 6 having higher advantages are set? Even if there is no suggestion that CB or BB (1) is likely to be won by making the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” easier on different winning lines, CB and BB (1) It is suggested that there is a high possibility that at least one of the possibility that BB (1) having higher advantage is elected or the setting value having higher advantage is set. Therefore, there is a high possibility that at least one of the possibility that BB (1) having a higher advantage among CB and BB (1) is elected or a setting value having a higher advantage is set. Even if no suggestion is suggested, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that CB or BB (1) is elected. Can be made.

  In addition, when BB (1) having a higher advantage is elected among CB and BB (1), among CB or BB (1) among winning lines L1 to L5, or In the case where at least one of the settings 4 to 6 having higher advantages among the settings 1 to 6 is set, the winning line is different from the winning line where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is easy to match, Even if it is not suggested that there is a high possibility that BB (1) with higher advantage among CB and BB (1) is won by making the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” easier. It is suggested that there is a high possibility that CB or BB (1) is winning or a setting value with a high advantage is set, and that CB or BB (1) is high. Even if it is not suggested that there is a high possibility that at least one of the possibility of winning or the setting value with high advantage is set, BB with higher advantage among CB and BB (1) Since it is suggested that (1) is likely to be elected, it is possible to expect an advantageous possibility on the other side even if an adverse possibility is suggested on the one hand.

  Further, in the case where settings 4 to 6 having higher advantages among the settings 1 to 6 are set, CB or BB (1) among the winning lines L1 to L5 is won, or CB and BB In the case of BB (1) with higher advantage among (1), the winning line is different from the winning line where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is easy to match in at least one of the cases. CB or BB (1) can be elected even if it is not suggested that a highly advantageous setting value is likely to be set by making the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” easy. BB or BB (1) is likely to be at least one of the possibility that BB (1) having higher advantage among CB and BB (1) is elected Even if it is not suggested that the possibility of winning or BB (1), which is more advantageous among CB and BB (1), is likely to be won, it is not suggested that Since it is suggested that there is a high possibility that a high set value is set, even if a disadvantageous possibility is suggested on the one hand, it is possible to expect an advantageous possibility on the other hand.

  In the present embodiment, as described later, when watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon is won and the watermelon is missed, the winning line L1, When control is made to match L2 and L3, and watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet is won and the watermelon is missed, the chance is higher than the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 Control to align with the winning lines L4 and L5 at a ratio, and even if a watermelon is missed, the possibility that CB or BB (1) is elected, of CB and BB (1) It is possible to determine the difference between the possibility that BB (1) having a higher advantage is won and the possibility that a setting value having a higher advantage is set, but the chance line is the winning line L1. The ratio that L2 and L3 are aligned and the ratio that chances are aligned to L4 and L5 are watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon is elected and watermelon is lost, watermelon +1 sheet, CB + watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) When + watermelon + 1 is elected and the watermelon is dropped, it may be controlled to be equal to each other. In this way, when the watermelon wins, CB or BB (1) The difference between the possibility of being won, the possibility that BB (1) with higher advantage among CB and BB (1) has been won, and the possibility that a setting value with higher advantage is set On the other hand, if you drop out a watermelon, there is a possibility that CB or BB (1) is winning, and BB (1) with higher advantage is won among CB and BB (1). Setting value with high possibility It becomes impossible to determine the difference in potential that is set, it is possible to increase the interest in the case of performing a game without Torikobosa watermelon.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a executes a small role notification effect for notifying that when a small role is won. Since the small role announcement production is executed at a higher rate when the special role is won than when the special role is not won, the small role announcement production is executed and the special role is won. This suggests the possibility of doing so.

  Further, the small role notification effect includes a first small role notification effect and a second small role notification effect, and the sub CPU 91a selects one of them when executing the small role notification effect. Perform small role announcement production. At this time, when the special role is won, the ratio of the second small role notification effect being selected is higher than when the special role is not won, so the second small role notification effect is executed. Then, it is suggested that there is a higher possibility of winning the special role than when the first small role notification effect is executed.

  In addition, since the ratio of the second small role announcement effect is higher when the watermelon and one of the watermelons are elected at the same time than when the watermelon is elected alone, the watermelon Possibility that CB or BB (1) suggested by the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is won at the time of winning, BB with higher advantage among CB and BB (1) The possibility that (1) has won, the possibility that a set value with high advantage is set, and the type of small role announcement effect are linked, and depending on the display mode and effect of these reels, CB or BB ( 1) Winning, CB and BB (1) winning BB (1) with higher advantage, synergistically increasing the player's expectation that a set value with higher advantage is set Can do.

  Further, when executing the small role notification effect, the sub CPU 91a selects the start timing, and starts the small role notification effect from the selected timing. There are four start timings at the start of the game, at the first stop, at the second stop, and at the third stop. When the special role is won, the ratio at which the third stop is selected Since the ratio decreases in the order of the second stop, the first stop, and the start of the game, it is likely that the player is most likely to win the special role when starting from the third stop. It is suggested that the possibility decreases in the order of the third stop, the second stop, and the first stop.

  Also, the ratio of the third stop and the second stop is higher when the watermelon and one are selected at the same time than when the watermelon is won alone among the watermelon and one. The possibility of winning CB or BB (1) suggested by the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” at the time of winning the watermelon, more advantageous among CB and BB (1) The possibility that BB (1) has won, the possibility that a highly advantageous setting value has been set, and the start timing of the small role announcement effect are linked, and the display mode of these reels and the start timing of the effect CB or BB (1) winning, CB and BB (1) of the more advantageous BB (1) winning, the player's expectation that the set value with a high advantage is set Can be synergistically enhanced

  In a conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when winning a specific role that may be missed is different from the reel stop control pattern used when none of the roles are won. If you miss any part, if you do not win any of the winning combinations, you can change the stop mode of the reel by stopping the specific stop mode that will not stop, but stop at the same timing There is only one type of specific stop mode that stops when a specific combination is missed by performing an operation, and there is a problem that the stop mode of the reel becomes monotonous.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon are selected and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” cannot be drawn into the winning line. "Black 7 / Net 7 / White 7 / Watermelon-Black 7 / Net 7 / White 7" except "Black 7-Black 7-Black 7", "Black 7-Black 7-White 7" and "Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon" / Watermelon-black 7 // white 7 / watermelon ”(hereinafter referred to as“ chance eyes ”) is given priority over the winning lines L1, L2, L3 over the winning lines L4, L5. If CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet is selected and the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” cannot be drawn into the winning line, the chance is Winning lines L1, L2, L3 And performs a control to align preferentially also pay line L4, L5.

  For this reason, even when watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon is elected, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet is elected, When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned with the winning line, but the watermelon, CB + If the watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon is won, that is, if only one watermelon is won by itself and the watermelon is missed, chances are aligned on the winning lines L1, L2, L3. If there is a high possibility, +1 watermelon, CB + watermelon +1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 is winning, that is, both watermelon and 1 water will win at the same time If the spill is a chance eyes is likely to align the pay line L4, L5.

  As a result, when watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon was elected and watermelon was missed, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet was elected and watermelon was missed Since the winning line where the chances are easy to match is different from the case, it is possible to diversify the reel stop mode when the watermelon is missed.

  The chances are that watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon won and dropped the watermelon, watermelon + 1, CB + watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 won the watermelon It is controlled to align with any winning line on condition that it has been missed, and if these roles or combinations of winning combinations are not won, chances are not aligned with any winning line. . For this reason, the possibility of winning CB or BB (1) is surely suggested by having chance chances on any winning line.

  Also, in this embodiment, as described above, CB or BB (1), that is, the case where the watermelon and one of the watermelons are elected at the same time than the case where the watermelon is elected alone, that is, Since the percentage of winning at the same time as the special role will increase, the special line will be won depending on whether the winning line with the chance is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5. It is possible to give a change to the degree of expectation of the player. Furthermore, even if the winning lines with the chances are the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 and the winning lines L4 and L5, it is suggested that the special role may have been won. It is impossible to determine whether or not a special role has been won from a winning line with uniform eyes, and a player who wins a special role is won regardless of which winning line the chances match. The feeling of expectation will not be spoiled.

  Also, in this embodiment, as described above, BB (1), that is, CB is more effective when one watermelon and one watermelon are selected at the same time than when one watermelon is selected alone. Since the percentage of winning a special role that can be expected to win a lot of medals will increase, the winning line with the chance will be either the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5. It is possible to change the player's expectation for winning of BB (1) having a higher advantage among CB and BB (1). Furthermore, it is suggested that CB or BB (1) may have been won regardless of whether the winning lines with the chances are the winning lines L1, L2, L3 or the winning lines L4, L5. However, it is impossible to determine whether the CB is won or the BB (1) is won from the winning line where the chances are aligned. The player's expectation for winning BB (1), which is more advantageous among CB and BB (1), is not impaired.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the setting values 4 to 6 are set when the watermelon and one of the watermelons are elected simultaneously rather than the case where the watermelon is elected at the same time. That is, since the ratio of setting values that are more advantageous to the player than when the settings 1 to 3 are set is increased, the winning lines with the same chance chance are the winning lines L1, L2, and L3. Or the winning lines L4 and L5, it can be estimated whether or not the set value is a set value advantageous to the player. Further, it is impossible to determine whether the setting values 1 to 3 or the settings 4 to 6 are set as the set values from the winning lines with the chances aligned, and any winning line is determined based on the chances. Even in the case where all of the settings are aligned, the player's expectation that the settings 4 to 6 having higher advantages among the settings 1 to 6 are set is not impaired.

  In this embodiment, when watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon is elected and the watermelon is dropped, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet is elected. The winning line where the chances are easy to match changes when the watermelon is missed, but the chance item 1 and the chance item 2 with different display modes are defined, and the watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon If you win and lose a watermelon, and if you win a watermelon +1, CB + watermelon +1, BB (1) + watermelon +1 and lose a watermelon, the type of chance eye that appears easily changes You may do it.

  Further, in this embodiment, when watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon is won and the watermelon is missed, chances are increased to the winning lines L1, L2, L3 at a higher rate than the winning lines L4, L5. If the control is aligned, and watermelon +1 sheet, CB + watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet is won and the watermelon is missed, the chance line is higher than the winning lines L1, L2, L3 Although control to align with L4 and L5 is performed, when watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon is won and the watermelon is missed, the chances are aligned only with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3. When control is performed and watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet is won and the watermelon is missed, the winning line is L4, L It may perform control to align only.

  Also, in this embodiment, when watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon is elected and the watermelon is dropped, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet are elected. Different chances are likely to be derived depending on when the watermelon is missed, but when watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet wins and watermelon is missed, watermelon + 1 Sheets, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon is elected and watermelon is missed, so that different chances are easily derived, watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet is elected If you miss a watermelon and a watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon wins, you will have different chances Watermelon, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon won and watermelon dropped out, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet won It is also possible to make it easier to derive a different chance eye depending on when the missed event is missed.

  Also, in this embodiment, the ratio of winning at the same time as the special role is higher when the watermelon and one piece are won at the same time than when the watermelon is won alone among the watermelon and one piece. Thus, the winning line of CB or BB (1), CB and BB (1) depending on whether the winning line with the chance chance is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5. In BB (1), which has a higher advantage, the player's expectation that a setting value with a higher advantage is set is changed. When the winning line is aligned, the process shifts to RT, which will be described later, and when the chance line is aligned with the winning line L1, L2, L3, shifts to the first RT, and the chance line is aligned with the winning line L4, L5. Sometimes the first R May be configured to shift to a second RT having a different degree of advantage (RT termination condition, winning probability of re-gamer, presence / absence notification type of winning combination, notification ratio, etc.). In addition, when the watermelon is missed, not only the display mode of the reels is diversified, but even if the display mode is the same chance line aligned with the winning line, the watermelon was missed when the watermelon was elected alone The advantage can be changed between an RT that may be shifted at the time and an RT that may be shifted when a watermelon is missed when one watermelon is selected.

  In a conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when winning a specific role that may be missed is different from the reel stop control pattern used when none of the roles are won. If you missed a certain role, there is something that suggests that you will miss a specific role by stopping a specific stop mode that will not stop if no role is elected, but when you miss a specific role If the player does not know the specific stop mode to be stopped, he cannot know that he has missed the elected special role, and in such a case, he simply missed the elected special role. It is difficult to determine whether or not

  Therefore, in this embodiment, watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet are won, and at the first stop (all reels are changing) When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position at which “watermelon” cannot be drawn into the winning line when any reel is stopped at (5), “black 7”, “net 7” or “white 7” At the stop operation position where “watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line where “Black 7”, “Net 7” or “White 7” is stopped on the remaining reels. When a stop operation is performed, control is performed to draw “watermelon” into the winning line where “black 7”, “net 7” or “white 7” is stopped. Also, watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet will be won, and "watermelon" will stop on any winning line at the first stop However, at the time of the second stop (when one of the two reels is changing and one of the reels is stopped), the “watermelon” cannot be pulled into the winning line where the “watermelon” stopped at the first stop. Even if the “watermelon” cannot be stopped at the winning line when the “watermelon” is stopped at the second stop time because the stop operation was performed at the operation position, at the third stop (any one reel is changing) At the stop operation position at which “watermelon” can be drawn into the pay line where “watermelon” has stopped at the time of the first stop. If the, and it performs a control to draw "watermelon" in pay lines stopped in "watermelon" during the first stop.

  That is, even if the watermelon is dropped out at the time of the first stop or the second stop, when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line for the remaining reels, the “watermelon-watermelon- Control to align a part of the combination of “watermelon” to the winning line is performed.

  For this reason, watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet were won, and watermelon was dropped at the time of the first stop and the second stop Even if the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where “watermelon” can be pulled into the winning line for the remaining reels, a part of the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination is aligned with the winning line. Even if the watermelon is missed at the time of the 1st stop or the 2nd stop, it is easy to determine whether or not the watermelon has been missed depending on whether or not a part of the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination is aligned with the winning line. Can be determined.

  Also, in this embodiment, watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet are won, and at the time of the first stop and the second stop If the watermelon is missed, it becomes an index symbol (“Black 7”, “Mesh 7” or “White 7” if it is missed during the first stop, and if it is missed during the second stop. Stopped “watermelon”) is regarded as a stop position where “watermelon” has stopped, and stop control is performed using a stop control table used when no watermelon is dropped. For this reason, a stop control table for stopping the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” on the winning line, and a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” when a watermelon is dropped during the first stop or the second stop Since there is no need to prepare a separate stop control table for stopping a part of the winning line on the winning line, a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be used when a watermelon is dropped during the first stop or the second stop. The storage capacity of the stop control table can be reduced even when control is performed to align part of the winning lines.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a, when the watermelon, CB + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, CB + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet are elected, at least until the second stop. It is preferable to notify the winner or the possibility. As a result, if the watermelon has been elected at the time of the first stop or the second stop, the fact that the watermelon has been won, or the possibility of that being announced, the “watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line for the remaining reels. A stop operation is performed at the stop operation position, and it becomes possible to determine whether or not a watermelon has been dropped depending on whether or not a part of the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned with the winning line. Thus, in the case where there are a plurality of roles that do not have stop operation positions that can be pulled in at the same time, that is, a plurality of roles that miss one when aiming at one, it is possible to accurately determine which one has been missed.

  Next, BB (1) of the present embodiment will be described.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, RB is always controlled during BB (1). In the RB, watermelon, 1 bell, 15 (1) to (4), black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry are eligible for winning, among which watermelon, 1 bell, 15 (1) ) To (4) are all accompanied by 15 payouts when winning in RB, while black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries always win two winning lines. When White Cherry wins a prize in RB, all are accompanied by 14 payouts. For this reason, in BB (1), only a small combination with 15 payouts (hereinafter referred to as 15 small roles) and a small role with 14 payouts (hereinafter referred to as 14 small roles) are awarded. It becomes a target.

  Also, BB (1) ends when both BB (1) and RB end when the total number of medals paid out during BB (1) exceeds 403, and in BB (1), 15 Only the small part and the 14 small part are eligible for winning, so the number of winnings for the 15 small part and the number of winnings for the 14 small part are paid out in BB (1). The value obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used for setting the number of bets in BB (1) from the total number of medals that have been set differs.

  Here, the number of nets increased by combination of the number of winnings of 15 small roles and the number of winning times of 14 small roles when the total number of medals paid out during BB (1) exceeds 403 is verified. However, in this embodiment, since the probability that the result of the internal lottery will be lost during RB is very low, it is assumed here that in the BB (1), 15 small winning combinations or 14 small winning combinations are always won.

  Since RB requires one medal to set the number of bets for starting the game, the net increase in BB (1) is 15x + 14y- (x + y) (x is a prize of 15 small roles) The number of times, y is the number of wins for 14 small roles)... (1).

  Since BB (1) ends when the total number of payouts exceeds 403, x and y are 15x + 14y> 403 and (1), 15 (x−1) + 14y ≦ 403 (where x ≠ 0)... Condition (1) or 15x + 14y> 403 and 15x + 14 (y−1) ≦ 403 (where y ≠ 0)... Condition (2) must be satisfied.

  Therefore, the net increase in number at the end of BB (1) can be obtained by substituting the values of x and y that satisfy these conditions (1) or (2) into the equation (1).

  Based on the above, the net increase in BB (1) is calculated. When y = 0, x = 27, and the net increase in BB (1) is 378 according to equation (1). Similarly, when y = 1, x = 26, and the net increase number in BB (1) is 377. When y = 2, x = 26 and the net increase number in BB (1). 390, and when y = 3, x = 25, and the net increase in BB (1) is 389. Even in the case of y = 4 to 29 (x = 24 to 0), the net increased number in BB (1) is less than 390. For this reason, in BB (1), the 14th small winning combination is won twice before the 15 small winning combination wins 26 times, and thereafter, only the 15 small winning combination is won, thereby obtaining the maximum net increase.

  In this embodiment, in BB (1) (RB), watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, bell, 15 sheets (1) + black cherry, 15 sheets (2) + net cherry, 15 sheets (3) + white cherry, 15 Sheet (4) is subject to internal lottery, and 15 small roles may be won independently, but 14 small roles will not be won independently, and be sure to win simultaneously with 15 small roles. It has become.

  In addition, the approximate winning probability of each combination or combination of combinations is 1/125, 1/250, 1 / 1.3, 1 / 14.9, 1 / 14.9, 1 / 14.9, 1 / The probability of loss is approximately 1/1000. In other words, in BB (1), either approximately 15 small roles (including 15 small roles + 15 small roles) or 15 small roles + 14 small roles is won, and 15% of these are 15%. A small role + 14 small roles will be elected. In BB (1), 14 small roles can be awarded only to games won by 15 small roles + 14 small roles, and on average in BB (1), 14 out of every 5 games. It is possible to win a small winning combination, and the number of winning small winning combinations before BB (1) is completed is 27 to 29. Therefore, in one BB (1), 5.4 to 5.8 times will be an opportunity to win 14 small roles.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3, with respect to the left reel, a display mode in which the “black 7” symbols constituting 15 sheets (1) stop on the winning line, and a “black cherry” symbol constituting black cherries stops on the winning line. The display mode is arranged in excess of the maximum pull-in range of 4 frames, and there is no stop operation position that can simultaneously aim at the “black 7” symbol and the “black cherry” symbol, The display mode in which the “net 7” symbol constituting 2) stops on the winning line and the display mode in which the “net cherry” symbol constituting the net cherry stops on the winning line exceeds the maximum drawing range of 4 frames. Are arranged so that there is no stop operation position that can simultaneously aim at the “net 7” symbol and the “net cherry” symbol, and the “white 7” symbols that make up 15 (3) symbols stop on the winning line Display mode and white The “white cherry” symbols that make up the tree are displayed in a way that stops on the winning line, and the maximum draw-in range of 4 frames is arranged, and the “white 7” symbols and “white cherry” symbols can be aimed simultaneously The array has no operation position.

  In BB (1), when black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries that are 14 small roles are won in the internal lottery as described above, there are no 15 stop operation positions that can be aimed at the same time (1). , 15 (2) and 15 (3) are also won at the same time, so when a 14-piece small combination and a 15-piece small combination are won at the same time, the player selects 14 symbols by aiming on the left reel. It is possible to select whether to win a small role or to win 15 small roles.

  Next, the CB of this embodiment will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CT is always controlled during the CB as described above. In CT, Replay (1), Replay (2), Watermelon, 1 sheet, Bell, 15 sheets (1) to (4), Black Cherry, Net Cherry, and White Cherry are among the prize winners, of which watermelon 1 card, 15 bells (1) to (4) will all be accompanied by 15 payouts when CT wins, while black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries must win two winning lines. Therefore, when these black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries win a prize in CT, all are accompanied by 14 payouts. For this reason, even during the CB, only the 15 small combinations and the 14 small combinations are targeted for winning.

  In addition, when the total number of medals paid out during the CB exceeds 149, both the CB and the CT are completed, and during the CB, only the 15 small combinations and the 14 small combinations are awarded. Since it is a target small role, the number of winnings for 15 small roles and the number of winning times for 14 small roles will be used to set the number of bets during CB from the total number of medals paid out during CB. The value obtained by subtracting the total number of medals received will be different.

  Here, the number of net increases by combination of the number of winnings for 15 small roles and the number of winning times for 14 small roles when the total number of medals paid out during CB exceeds 149 is verified. However, in this embodiment, even if a re-gamer wins during CT, neither the number of medals used for the bet nor the total number of payouts in the CB will change, and a certain winning will always occur unless the operating procedure is incorrect. In this case, it is assumed that at least 15 small roles or 14 small roles are won during the CB.

  Since CT requires one medal to set the number of bets for starting the game, the net increase in CB is 15x + 14y− (x + y) (x is the number of winnings for 15 small roles, y Is the number of winning prizes for 14 small roles)... (2).

  Further, since the CB ends when the total number of payouts exceeds 149, x and y are 15x + 14y> 149 and (3), 15 (x−1) + 14y ≦ 149 (where x ≠ 0). Condition (1) or 15x + 14y> 149 and 15x + 14 (y−1) ≦ 149 (where y ≠ 0)... Condition (4) must be satisfied.

  Therefore, the net increase at the end of the CB can be obtained by substituting the values of x and y that satisfy these conditions (3) or (4) into equation (2).

  Based on the above, the net increase in the CB is calculated. When y = 0, x = 10, and the net increase in the CB is 140 according to the equation (2). Similarly, when y = 1, x = 10, and the net increase number in CB is 153. When y = 2, x = 9, and the net increase number in CB is 152. = 3, x = 8, and the net increase in the number of CBs is 151. Even when y = 4 to 11 (x = 7 to 0), the net increase in the number of CBs is less than 153. For this reason, in CB, before winning the 15 small winning combinations 10 times, the 14 small winning combinations are won once, and after that, only the 15 small winning combinations are awarded, thereby obtaining the maximum net increase.

  In the present embodiment, in CB (CT), only replay (1) and replay (2) are targeted for internal lottery, and the approximate winning probabilities of the respective combinations are 1/3 and 1/8000. During the CB, 14 small roles can be awarded only for games won by the re-gamer. On average, during the CB, 14 small roles can be awarded once every 3 games. The number of times that a small role wins before the CB is finished is 10 to 11, so there is an opportunity to win 14 small roles in 3.3 to 3.7 times in one CB.

  Further, in this embodiment, the left and middle reels are arranged such that the bells and the “bells” constituting the 15 sheets (4) are within 4 symbols, and the “bells” can be drawn with a maximum of 4 frames. Can be stopped at any winning line. On the other hand, on the right reel, the interval between the bells and the “bells” or “replays” that make up 15 sheets (4) is arranged to exceed one symbol, and the drawing range of the right reel is limited to one symbol. If “Bell” or “Replay” cannot be stopped at any winning line, the left and middle reels are set to the first stop when the re-player is not elected in CB (CT). In the right reel, the intervals between the “bells” or “replays” that make up the 15 sheets (4) are arranged within 2 symbols, and even in the pull-in range of a maximum of 1 frame, Since it is possible to stop “Replay” on the winning line, when the right reel is set to the first stop, a combination of bells or 15 (4) is always aligned on any winning line. If the left reel is the final stop and the re-playing combination is aligned at the same time as the combination of the bell or 15 (4), one of the combinations of 15 (1) to (3) is aligned on the winning line. By doing so, the small role and the replaying role are not won simultaneously.

  The left reel is arranged so that the interval between the “replay” constituting the replay (1) and the “bell” constituting the replay (2) is within 4 symbols each. “Replay” or “Bell” can be stopped at any winning line, and the interval between “replays” constituting replay (1) and replay (2) is within 4 symbols on the middle reel. It is possible to stop “Replay” at any winning line with a maximum of 4 frames. On the other hand, the interval between “replays” constituting the replay exceeds 1 symbol on the right reel, and the drawing range of the right reel is limited to 1 symbol, so that “replay” can be set to any winning line. Since it cannot be stopped, if the re-gamer is elected in CT, there is a possibility that the left reel or the middle reel may be missed if it is first stopped. On the right reel, there are places where the interval of “Replay” exceeds 4 symbols, and it may not be possible to stop “Replay” on the winning line within the drawing range of up to 1 frame. Even when the reel is in the first stop, the replay (1) and the replay (2) may be missed. If the right reel is in the first stop and the replay (1) or replay (2) is missed on the right reel, the combination of bells or 15 (4) must be on any winning line. Become. Also, if the left reel is the final stop and one of the cherries is aligned at the same time as the replay (1) or replay (2) combination, either of the cherries will be aligned on the winning line. The small role and the re-playing role are not won simultaneously.

  Specifically, when replay (1) is won during CB (CT) and a stop operation is performed from the right reel, both the combination of 15 small combinations with the largest payout number and the combination of replay (1) Can be stopped on the winning line 0-4, 7-12, 15-17, 20th position can be stopped in the lower stage within the drawing range within 1 design (0-4, 6-6 When the stop operation is performed in the areas Nos. 12, 14 to 17, 19, and 20), control is performed to stop these symbols 0 to 4, 7 to 12, 15 to 17, and 20 in the lower stage. When a stop operation is performed at a position where the symbols 0 to 4, 7 to 12, 15 to 17, and 20 cannot be stopped in the lower range within the drawing range within 1 symbol (regions 5, 13, and 18). Is a control that stops the stop position where only the combination of 15 small combinations can be stopped on the winning line, that is, the stop position where the “bell” stops on any winning line, within the drawing range within one symbol. Is done.

  When the symbols 0-4, 7-12, 15-17, and 20 on the right reel stop at the lower stage and the middle reel is stopped, a combination of 15 small combinations and replay (1) Since there is no stop position at which both of them can be stopped on the winning line, it is a stopping position at which only the combination of replay (1) can be stopped at the winning line regardless of the stop operation position. , 9, 13, and 18 are controlled to stop at the lower stage, and only the combination of replay (1) listens to any of the winning lines L1 to L5.

  In the state where only the combination of replay (1) is listening to the winning line L1, either “cherry” does not stop in the upper or lower stage within the drawing range within 4 symbols, and “replay” stops in the middle stage If a left reel stop operation is performed at a position where it is possible, the combination of replay (1) wins, and it is possible to stop “replay” in the middle stage within the drawing range within 4 symbols, If the left reel is stopped at the position where the “cherry” stops at either the upper or lower level (areas 5, 6, 12, 13, 19, 20), the cherry and replay ( In order to avoid the double winning of 1), control is performed to stop the “cherry” at the upper stage or the lower stage, and the cherry that is a 14-piece small role wins.

  While only the combination of replay (1) is listening to the winning line L2 or L4, either “Cherry” does not stop in the middle or lower stage within the drawing range within 4 symbols, and “Replay” stops in the upper stage When the left reel is stopped at a position where it can be played, the combination of replay (1) wins and it is possible to stop “replay” in the upper stage within the drawing range within 4 symbols. However, if the left reel is stopped at the position where the “cherry” stops at either the middle or lower level (areas 4, 5, 11, 12, 18, and 19), In order to avoid repeated winnings in Replay (1), control is performed to stop “Cherry” at the upper or lower level, and the cherry that is a 14-piece small role wins.

  When only the combination of replay (1) is listening to the winning line L3 or L5, either “Cherry” does not stop in the upper or middle stage within the drawing range within 4 symbols, and “Replay” stops in the lower stage When the left reel is stopped at a position where it can be played, the combination of replay (1) wins and it is possible to stop “replay” in the upper stage within the drawing range within 4 symbols. However, if the left reel is stopped at the position where the “cherry” stops at either the upper or middle level (areas 2, 3, 9, 10, 16, 17), In order to avoid duplicate winnings in Replay (1), control is performed to stop “Cherry” in the upper or middle stage, and the cherry that is a 14-piece small role wins.

  In the right reel, the symbols 0-4, 7-12, 15-17, 20 can not be stopped at the lower stage within the drawing range within one symbol, "Bell" stops at any winning line, the middle reel When the stop operation is performed, “Bell” is placed on the stop position where only the combination of 15 small plays can be stopped on the winning line, that is, the winning line where “Bell” is stopped on the right reel. The pull-in control is performed, and the 15 small winning combination listens to one of the winning lines L1 to L5.

  If the left reel stop operation is performed while only the 15 small roles are listening to any of the winning lines L1 to L5, the winning line where the 15 small roles are listening regardless of the stop operation position. Then, “bell”, “black 7”, “net 7”, and “white 7” are controlled, and 15 small roles are awarded.

  It should be noted that the same control is performed when the replay (2) is won during CB (CT), and a detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the replay (1) and the replay (2) are not won during the CB (CT), it is possible to always win 15 small winning combinations by stopping from the right reel. it can. On the other hand, when replay (1) and replay (2) are won in CB (CT), the reels are stopped in the order of the right reel, the middle reel, and the left reel, and the right reel is 0-4, 7 ~ 12, 15-17, 20th symbol is stopped at the position where it can be stopped at the lower stage within the drawing range within 1 symbol (0-4, 6-12, 14-17, 19, 20th region) Depending on the winning line that the replay (1) and replay (2) listened to, the left reel will stop one of the “cherries” on the winning line when the combination of replay (1) and replay (2) is complete. By performing a stop operation at a position where it cannot be avoided, it is possible to win a 14-piece small role, stop in the order of the right reel, the middle reel, and the left reel, and stop the right reel at 0 -4, 7-12, 15 By performing 17,20 number symbol at a position that can not be stopped in the lower stage in the pull-in range within one symbol (region of No. 5,13,18) it is possible to prize the 15 pieces of Small Win. In other words, when replay (1) and replay (2) are won during CB (CT), the player selects a stop operation procedure to win 14 small roles or 15 small You can choose whether to win a role.

  Conventionally, there has been proposed a slot machine that sets an upper limit on the number of medals that can be paid out during a bonus, and terminates the bonus when the number of medals paid out to a player during the bonus exceeds the upper limit. Yes. In this type of slot machine, the bonus will end when the total number of payouts in the bonus exceeds the upper limit, so the number of medals won during the bonus will not change, and the interest will be impaired. .

  For this reason, in the bonus, a plurality of small roles with different payout numbers can be won, and by adjusting the number of winning times of each small role, the small role is finally set in a state where the total number of payouts is just below the upper limit. It is conceivable that by winning a prize, it is possible to obtain more medals than in the case where the number of winnings of the small role is not adjusted.

  However, in such a configuration, the number of wins for a plurality of small roles in the bonus is not necessarily the limit of the upper limit, and is not necessarily the upper limit of the total number of payouts. In order to adjust to the total number of payouts, even if an unnecessary small role is elected, it is necessary to dare to drop that small role, and the amount of medals used for setting the bet number will be consumed wastefully. There is a problem that the number of medals that can be acquired in the bonus is reduced.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the number of winnings for 15 small winning combinations that can be won in BB (1) and the number of winnings for 14 small winning combinations differ according to the number of net increases in BB (1), 15 It is possible to obtain the maximum net increase in BB (1) by adjusting the number of winnings for the small part and the number of winnings for the 14 small part, but the 14 small part in BB (1) Is elected at the same time, and when 15 small roles and 14 small roles are won at the same time, that is, 15 (1) + black cherry, 15 (2) + net cherry Or, if 15 (3) + white cherries are selected at the same time, one of the “black 7” or “black cherry” symbols, the “net 7” or “net cherry” symbols on the left reel, "White 7" design or "White cherry" design By selecting the stop operation position to draw one of the winning line, either by winning the 14 pieces of Small Win, either by winning the 15 pieces of Small Win, it is possible to select.

  In BB (1), the number of net increase is the maximum (2 times), and in the situation where 14 small roles have already been won, even if 14 small roles are won, it is possible to win 15 small roles Therefore, in BB (1), which ends when the total number of payouts exceeds the specified number, even when adjusting the total number of payouts by the player's technical intervention, medals are not consumed wastefully by removing the small role, It is possible to obtain the maximum net increase in BB (1).

  In particular, as in the present embodiment, the chance that 14 small winning combinations can be won in BB (1) is greater than the number of winning winning combinations of 14 small winning combinations with the largest net increase in BB (1). In the case where the ratio is set high, the above effect is remarkable.

  Also, in order to obtain the maximum net increase in BB (1), 14 small roles are won twice before 15 small roles are won 26 times in BB (1), and then 15 Only small roles need to be awarded. In other words, in order to obtain the maximum net increase, it is necessary to win both 14 and 15 small prizes, and it is necessary to select the number of winning prizes by the player's technical intervention. The interest in (1) can be enhanced.

  In addition, the number of bets necessary for starting the game in the normal gaming state or RT is 3, whereas the number of bets necessary for starting the game in BB (1) is 1, which is smaller than that in the normal gaming state. In BB (1), since the number of medals consumed in the game is smaller than that in the normal gaming state, the net increase that can be obtained in BB (1) can be further increased.

  In this embodiment, the number of medals required for setting the number of bets necessary for starting the game is 1 during BB (1), and 15 coins with 15 payouts as a small part that can be won in BB (1). When the total number of payouts in BB (1) exceeds the number of payouts in 14 small roles and BB (1), the specified number of BB (1) end conditions is 403, and in BB (1) In the BB (1), the total number of payouts exceeds the specified number of BBs. When (1) is finished, the number of winnings of the first small part and the number of winnings of the second small part among the first small part and second small part that can be won in BB (1) Depending on the combination, it is necessary to start the game so that the number of net increase at that time differs. The number of medals required for setting the number of bets, the number of payouts b for the first small combination, the number of payouts c for the second small combination, and the value of the specified number M as the end condition of BB (1) are respectively determined. Just do it.

  For example, if a = 1, b = 15, c = 1, and M = 405, and the second small combination is won, the first small combination is won simultaneously, When the second small combination is elected simultaneously, the first small combination or the second small combination may be selected and awarded. In this case, the first small role is won 28 times and the second small role is won 0 times in BB (1), that is, only the first small role is won in BB (1). In this case, the net increase in number that can be acquired in BB (1) is the maximum, and if the second small role is won even once, the maximum net increase in number cannot be acquired. Thus, in order to maximize the net increase that can be acquired in BB (1), it is necessary to win only the first small role, and even if the second small role is won, Since technical intervention always requires the first small role to be awarded, the interest in BB (1) can be enhanced.

  Also, in BB (1), 15 small roles (first small role) may be elected alone, and 14 small roles will be awarded only in a game where 15 small roles + 14 small roles are won. However, for example, in the BB (1), it is possible to always win a 15-piece small combination and a 14-sheet small combination at the same time. By doing so, in the BB (1), By selecting whether to win 15 small roles or 14 small roles in each game so that the net increase is maximized, the maximum net increase can be reliably obtained through technical intervention. It becomes possible.

  Also, in BB (1), when 14 small roles are won, 15 small roles that do not have stop operation positions that can be aimed at the same time are simultaneously won, and the player selects a target pattern so that the 14 small roles are selected. The player can select the order of stopping the reels, and further, the order of stopping the reels and the timing of the stop operation. Accordingly, it may be possible to select whether to win a 14 small winning combination or to win a 15 small winning combination.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, for the left, a display mode in which the “black cherry” symbol stops on any winning line, and a display in which the “net cherry” symbol stops on any winning line And the display mode in which the “white cherry” symbol stops on one of the winning lines, are arranged in excess of 4 frames which is the maximum drawing range, “black cherry” symbol, “net cherry” symbol, The arrangement is such that there is no stop operation position for simultaneously targeting the “white cherry” symbol, the display mode in which the “black 7” symbol stops on any winning line, and the “net 7” symbol any winning The display mode that stops on the line and the display mode that the “white 7” symbol stops on any of the winning lines are arranged in excess of 4 frames that is the maximum drawing range, and the “black 7” symbol, "7" symbol, "7" symbol The are simultaneously aim a sequence stop operation position does not exist.

In BB (1), the 14 small roles are black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries. When the 14 small roles are elected, there are 15 small roles that do not have stop operation positions that can be aimed simultaneously. 15 (1), 15 (2), 15 (3) are won at the same time,
The black reel, black cherry, white cherry black cherries, black cherries and white cherry symbols, or black 7 symbols, net 7 symbols, and white 7 symbols. Can not be intentionally stopped on the winning line, so even if 15 (1) + black cherry, 15 (2) + net cherry, 15 (3) + white cherry are won, these 15 (1), 15 (2), 15 (3), black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries cannot be deliberately won. If a combination of these roles is won, 1 The desired combination can be won with a probability of / 3, but the chance of winning a small role will be adjusted so that the net increase will be maximized because the 2/3 probability will be missed or an unintended role will be won Difficult to do.

  On the other hand, in the BB (1), the sub CPU 91a wins the winning combination when 15 (1) + black cherry, 15 (2) + net cherry, 15 (3) + white cherry are simultaneously won. It is possible to execute simultaneous winning notification that notifies the type of the combination (the type of combination of winning combination identified from the internal winning flag).

  The simultaneous winning notification indicates that 15 sheets (1) + black cherries have been won, 15 sheets (2) + net cherries have been won, and 15 sheets (3) + white cherries have been won. Color or pattern (15 (1) + black if black cherry indicates winning, 15 (2) + shaded if net cherry indicates winning, 15 (3) + white When the cherry indicates that it has won, white) is notified to notify the type of the winning combination.

  Note that the simultaneous winning notification is not limited as long as the player can recognize the type of the winning combination, suggesting the type of winning combination itself, the combination of symbols, the symbols that differ depending on the type of winning combination, and the types of these winning combinations. It may be notified by displaying an image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, or may be notified by turning on a corresponding LED, outputting a corresponding sound, or the like. Furthermore, a symbol that is an index of a different symbol depending on the type of winning combination (such as a symbol that is located near the constituent symbol of the winning combination and stands out from the constituent symbol of the winning combination), an image that suggests the indicator symbol, etc. You may make it alert | report.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when 15 (1) + black cherries, 15 (2) + net cherries, 15 (3) + white cherries are simultaneously won in BB (1), simultaneous winning notifications are made. By being executed, it becomes possible for the player to recognize the type of the winning combination won based on the notification content, and as a result, an operation procedure for winning the 15 small winning combinations and an operation for winning the 14 small winning combinations. Knowing the procedure, the player can deliberately select 15 or 14 small roles to win, and adjust the number of winnings for small roles so that the net increase is maximized. Is possible.

  In the simultaneous winning notification, in addition to the color or pattern suggesting winning, either “cherry” or “7” of the suggested color or pattern is notified. Specifically, until one of the cherries wins twice, the “cherry” constituting the 14-piece small role is notified, and after any cherry wins twice, the “7” Is notified. That is, the procedure for maximizing the number of net increase is notified. If any of the cherries wins three or more times, according to the number of games at that time, according to the number of games at that time, the predicted net increase when 14 small roles are won, and the predicted net increase when 15 small roles are won When the predicted net increase in the case where 14 small roles are won is larger, “Cherry” is notified, and the predicted net increase in the case where 15 small roles are won is more If there are many, “7” is notified. That is, the procedure for maximizing the number of net increase at that time is always notified, and the player can know the best operation procedure at that time.

  In this embodiment, the 15 small roles and the 14 small roles consist of a plurality of small roles that cannot be aimed at the same time. Even if the 15 small roles and the 14 small roles are won simultaneously, the winning combination is won. However, for example, when a 15-book small combination and a 14-sheet small combination are simultaneously won in BB (1), The operation procedure for winning a small winning combination and the operation procedure for winning a 14 small winning combination may be fixed, and in this way, the player can play 15 small winning combinations. When 14 small winning combinations are won at the same time, it is possible to reliably select whether to win a 15 small winning combination or a 14 small winning combination.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a does not execute simultaneous winning notification for all BB (1), but performs simultaneous winning notification in BB (1) only when a specific condition is satisfied. Whether or not the sub CPU 91a executes simultaneous winning notification in BB (1) is determined according to the winning line where the combination of BB (1) is stopped when BB (1) wins. In this embodiment, when the combination of BB (1) is aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5, 15 (1) + black cherry, 15 (2) + net cherry, 15 (3) + white cherry When winning, the simultaneous winning notification is executed, and when the combination of BB (1) is aligned with the winning lines L1 to L3, the simultaneous winning notification is not executed.

  In this embodiment, when only BB (1) is elected alone, the combination of BB (1) is preferentially drawn into the winning lines L1 to L3, while BB (1) and the small part are simultaneously elected. In such a case, the winning lines L4 and L5 are controlled so that the combination of BB (1) is preferentially drawn into the winning lines L4 and L5. In the period from winning BB (1) until winning, the game is controlled by RT (4) as will be described later, and the winning probability of the re-gamer is increased, and the game in which BB (1) and the re-gamer are simultaneously won Then, since BB (1) does not win, in a game in which the re-player is not elected after winning BB (1), that is, a game in which BB (1) can be won, about 1 Only BB (1) is elected alone at a rate of / 2, and BB (1) and small roles are elected simultaneously at a rate of about 1/2. For this reason, every time BB (1) occurs twice, simultaneous winning notification is executed at a rate of once.

  Even when only BB (1) is elected alone, it is impossible to align with the stop operation positions (winning lines L1 to L3, but it is possible to align with winning lines L4 and L5. It is possible to stop the combination of BB (1) on the winning lines L4 and L5 depending on the stop operation position), and it is possible to execute simultaneous winning notification on all BB (1) by the technical intervention of the player. Is possible.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the simultaneous winning notification is executed only in the BB (1) only when the specific condition is satisfied, and thus the winning number of the small role is adjusted only in the BB (1) that satisfies the specific condition. It is possible to increase the number of net increase that can be acquired compared to BB (1) that does not satisfy the specific condition. That is, even for the same BB (1), it is possible to make a difference in the net increase in number that can be acquired depending on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied.

  In the present embodiment, simultaneous winning notification is executed in BB (1) only when a specific condition is satisfied. However, when the specific condition is satisfied, the specific condition is satisfied. Simultaneous winning notification may be executed in BB (1) at a higher rate than in the case where there is not. In addition, the specific condition is not limited to BB (1) being aligned with a specific winning line, for example, winning a lottery, or a specific type of a plurality of types of BBs (such as BBs having different combinations of symbols). It may be BB.

  Further, in this embodiment, as with BB (1), since the number of 15 small winning combinations that can be won in CB and the number of 14 small winning combinations are different from the net increase in CB, 15 By adjusting the number of winnings for a small role and the number of winning times for a 14-piece small size, it becomes possible to obtain the maximum net increase in the number of CBs. In CB, replay (1) or replay (2) is possible. It is possible to win 14 small roles only when winning, and when replay (1) or replay (2) is won, the reels are stopped in the order of right reel, middle reel, left reel, and right reel Further, by selecting the stop operation position of the left reel, it is possible to select whether to win a 14 small winning combination or to win a 15 small winning combination.

  Replay (1) or replay (2) that can win 14 small roles in the situation where the number of net increase is the maximum (1 time) in CB, and 14 small roles have already won. Even in the case where the total number of payouts exceeds the prescribed number, the CB that ends when the total number of payouts exceeds the specified number will be removed even if the total number of payouts is adjusted by the player's technical intervention. Thus, it is possible to obtain the maximum net increase in CB without wasting medals wastefully.

  In particular, as in the present embodiment, the opportunity to win 14 small roles during the CB (replay (1) or replay (2) winning) is the 14 small roles that have the largest net increase during the CB. In the case where the ratio of increasing the number of winnings is set high, the above effect is remarkable.

  In order to obtain the maximum net increase in CB, 14 small roles are won once before 15 small roles win 10 times in CB, and only 15 small roles are won thereafter. There is a need. In other words, in order to obtain the maximum net increase, it is necessary to win both 14 and 15 small roles, and it is necessary to select the number of winning times for both by the player's technical intervention. You can enhance your interests.

  In addition, while the number of bets necessary for starting the game in the normal gaming state or RT is 3, the number of bets necessary for starting the game in the CB is 1, which is smaller than that in the normal gaming state, and during the CB. Since the number of medals consumed in the game is smaller than that in the normal gaming state, the net increase that can be obtained in BB (1) can be further increased.

  In the present embodiment, the number of medals required for setting the number of bets required for starting the game during the CB is 1, and the 15 small combinations with 14 payouts and the 14 small combinations that can be won during the CB. 14 small roles with payout, and the total number of payouts in the CB exceeds the specified number of CBs as the CB termination condition is 149. In the CB, 15 small roles are 10 times and 14 small roles are 1 The maximum net increase can be obtained by winning a round, but at least when the CB is finished when the total number of payouts exceeds the prescribed number in the CB, the first small role that can be won in the CB and Necessary for the start of the game so that the net increase at that time differs depending on the combination of the number of winnings of the first small part and the number of winnings of the second small part of the second small part. The number of medals required for setting the number of bets, paying the first small role Number b, the payout number c of the second small win, the value of the specified number of sheets M to be termination condition of the CB may if determined respectively.

  For example, a = 1, b = 15, c = 1, M = 150, and when winning the replay (1) or replay (2), the first small combination or the second small combination is selected and won. It may be possible to make it. In this case, if the first small role is won 11 times in the CB and the second small role is won 0 times, that is, if only the first small role is won in the CB, The net increase in the number that can be acquired becomes the maximum, and if the second small role is won even once, the maximum number of net increase cannot be acquired. Thus, in order to maximize the net increase that can be obtained during the CB, it is necessary to win only the first small role. Even if the second small role is won, the player's technical intervention Since the necessity to always win the first small role arises, the interest in CB can be enhanced.

  Also, in CB, when winning a replay (1) or replay (2), 14 small roles are won using a control that avoids a double winning of a small role and a replaying role. In the reels for which the number of frames to be drawn is limited, it is possible to stop only the constituent symbols of the 14 small figures out of the constituent symbols of the 15 small figures and the constituent symbols of the 14 small figures in the drawing range of one symbol. In a position where it is possible to stop only the constituent symbols of 14 small roles in the drawing range of one symbol out of the constituent symbols of 15 small characters and 14 small characters when winning a re-playing character. If a stop operation is performed, 14 small roles may be won.

  In CB, when winning a replay (1) or a replay (2), whether to win a 15-piece small combination or a 14-sheet small combination by selecting the reel stop order and the reel stop operation position. However, for example, it is possible to select a symbol arrangement in which it is impossible to simultaneously draw the constituent symbols of 15 small figures and the constituent symbols of 14 small figures. Stopping the reels, such as winning a 15 small winning combination when a stop operation is performed in the drawing range, and winning a 14 small winning combination when performing a stop operation in the drawing range of the 14 symbols small drawing component By selecting only the operation position, it may be possible to select whether to win a 15 small winning combination or to win a 14 small winning combination.

  Further, when stopping from the left reel, 15 small winning combinations are won, and when stopping from the right reel, 14 small winning combinations are awarded, so that only the reel stop order is selected. It may be possible to select whether to win a small winning combination or to win a 14 small winning combination. Further, in this case, it is preferable to make a symbol arrangement in which any of the 15 small winning combinations or 14 small winning combinations always wins in any stop order and does not miss out. It is possible to select a small role to be awarded by simple technical intervention. Further, in this case, when the re-game player is elected and the small bonus has not been won for the number of times that the net increase is the maximum, the stop operation from the right reel is instructed, and the net increase is the maximum. When 14 small roles have won the number of times, it is preferable to provide a notification effect instructing a stop operation from the left reel, which makes it easier for the player during CB It is possible to obtain the maximum net increase.

  When the replay (1) and the replay (2) are won during the CB, the sub CPU 91a can execute a replay winning notification to notify that effect. The replay winning notification notifies that replay (1) or replay (2) has been won by a color (blue in this embodiment) suggesting the winning. Note that the replay winning notification is made by displaying on the liquid crystal display 51 an image suggesting that Replay (1) or Replay (2) has been won, or by LED lighting, audio output, or the like. It may be what you do.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the replay (1) or the replay (2) is won in the CB, the replay winning notification is executed, so that the player can select either the 14-piece small combination or the 15-sheet small combination. It becomes possible to recognize that it is possible to select and win one, and there is no need to play the game while always paying attention to the stop operation procedure, and only when the replay winning notification is executed, Since it is only necessary to select an operation procedure for winning 14 small roles, the burden on the player in the CB can be reduced.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a does not execute the replay winning notification for all the CBs, and executes the replay winning notification in the CB only when a specific condition is satisfied. The condition for determining whether or not to execute the replay winning notification is the same as that for BB (1), and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  In the present embodiment, in the CB, when replay (1) or replay (2) is won, a procedure for winning 15 small roles and a procedure for winning 14 small roles are fixed. It may be made to fluctuate and the modification is explained below.

  In this modification, replay (1) or replay (2) is won with a probability of 1/3 in CB. Then, when neither replay (1) nor replay (2) is won in the CB, control is performed so that 15 small combinations are won regardless of the operation procedure. In addition, when Replay (1) is won, control is performed so that a 14 small winning combination wins when stopped from the left reel, and a 15 small winning combination wins when stopped from the right reel. On the other hand, when Replay (2) is won, control is performed so that 14 small winning combinations win when stopped from the right reel, and 15 small winning combinations win when stopped from the left reel.

  For this reason, if you do not know whether Replay (1) or Replay (2) is winning even if Replay (1) or Replay (2) is won, It is impossible to intentionally select whether or not to win, and a desired role can be won with a probability of 1/2, but an unintended role wins with a probability of 1/2, resulting in a net increase. It will be difficult to adjust the number of wins for the small role so that the number of tickets is maximized.

  On the other hand, in this modified example, when the replay (1) or the replay (2) is won during the CB, the sub CPU 91a is the type of the replaying player selected (replay (1) or replay (2) It is possible to execute the replay type notification for notifying whether or not. The replay type notification may be any information that can identify the type of the re-playing winning combination.

  In this modified example, when the replay (1) or the replay (2) is won, the replay type notification is executed, so that the player can recognize the type of the replaying player who is won by the notification content. As a result, it is possible to know the operation procedure for winning the 15 small roles and the operation procedure for winning the 14 small roles, and the player intentionally selects the 15 small roles or the 14 small roles and wins. It is possible to adjust the number of wins for the small role so that the net increase is maximized.

  In addition, in the replay type notification, in addition to the type of the re-playing winning combination, a notification indicating one of a stop from the left reel or a stop from the right reel is made by an arrow. Specifically, until the 14 small roles win once, the arrow indicating stop from the left reel if Replay (1) is won, and the stop from the right reel if Replay (2) is won An arrow for instructing, ie, an operation procedure for winning a 14-piece small combination is notified, and after the 14-piece small combination has won once, if replay (1) is won, a stop from the right reel is instructed. If the arrow and the replay (2) are won, an arrow for instructing a stop from the left reel, that is, an operation procedure for winning a 15 small winning combination is notified. That is, the procedure for maximizing the number of net increase is notified. If any of the 14 small roles wins more than once, the predicted net increase in the case of winning 14 small roles according to the number of games at that time, and the case where 15 small roles are won The predicted net increase is compared, and if the predicted net increase in the case of winning 14 small roles is larger, the operation procedure for winning the 14 small roles is notified, and the 15 small roles are awarded. In the case where the predicted number of net increase is greater, an operation procedure for winning 14 small roles is notified. That is, the procedure for maximizing the number of net increase at that time is always notified, and the player can know the best operation procedure at that time.

  In this modification, in the replay type notification, in addition to the type of re-gamer, an operation procedure that maximizes the net increase is notified, but replay (1) and replay (2) are won. At this time, the type of re-game player may not be notified, and the operation procedure that maximizes the net increase may be notified.

  Further, in this modified example, the sub CPU 91a does not execute the replay type notification for all the CBs as in the case of the simultaneous winning notification of BB (1), and the replay type notification is performed in the CB only when a specific condition is satisfied. It is preferable to adjust the number of winnings for a small role only in a CB that satisfies a specific condition, and increase the net increase in number that can be obtained compared with a CB that does not satisfy a specific condition. Can do. That is, even with the same CB, it is possible to make a difference in the net increase in number that can be acquired depending on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied.

  In this embodiment, after the CB and BB (1) end, the main CPU 41a has the same special lottery and lottery probabilities as in the normal gaming state, but both the replay (1) and replay (2) win probabilities are the same. Replay time (1) with a higher probability than the normal gaming state and a medal payout rate per game (winning probability of the target role x total number of payouts / number of bets required for one game) exceeding 1 (RT (1)). Then, RT (1) does not win any special role, does not win replay (2), and the prescribed number of games (in this example, 50 games if CB is over, BB (1) After the game is over, 20 games) will be reached, or any special role will be won before the specified number of games is reached, or Replay (2) will win and will move to RT (2) described later It is supposed to end.

  In addition, when the replay (2) wins in the normal gaming state, RT (1), and RT (3), which will be described later, the special role (if none of the special roles have been carried over) and small lottery probabilities are normal. Although it is the same as the gaming state, the winning probability of replay (1) is higher than that of the normal gaming state and RT (1), the winning probability of replay (2) is higher than that of the normal gaming state, and one game The replay time (2) (RT (2)) is controlled such that the payout rate of the winning medal is higher than that of RT (1). Then, RT (2) does not win any special roles, reaches any of the specified number of games (200 games in this embodiment) without winning any of the cherries, or before reaching the specified number of games. It ends with either winning a special role or winning one of the cherries. Also, if any special role is won during RT (2), RT (2) will not end even if any cherry wins, and the specified number of games will be reached. The RT (2) will not end until the winning special role wins.

  As described above, in this embodiment, after CB and BB (1) are finished, the control is performed to RT (1) in which the winning probability of replay (2) that becomes a trigger for transition to RT (2) is increased. By controlling to RT (1), the player's expectation to shift to RT (2) can be enhanced.

  In RT (2), the payout rate of medals per game is higher than that of RT (1), the number of predetermined games as the end condition is larger than RT (1), and more medals than RT (1). Therefore, by controlling to RT (1), it is possible to further increase the player's expectation to shift to RT (2).

  Also, RT (1) and RT (2) both have an expected increase rate of medals per game exceeding 1, and an increase in medals can be expected only by being controlled by RT (1). By shifting to 2), further increase in medals can be expected.

  In addition, RT (2) will be special if any special role is won after the start of RT (2) and before the specified number of games is reached, if the selected special role does not win. RT (2) will not end with the winning of and if the selected special combination is not awarded, it will be possible to continue control to RT (2) until the specified number of games is reached. Even if a special role is won in 2), if the selected special role is not won, RT (2) can be consumed until the specified number of games is reached, giving the player a sense of loss. There is no end.

  In addition, since the winning flag of the special role is carried over after the next game until the special role is won, after the RT (2) reaches the specified number of games, the special role won during that time is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the special role at the end of RT (2).

  If any cherry wins during RT (2), RT (2) will end even if the specified number of games has not been reached since the start of RT (2) unless any special role is won However, only one black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries that are part of the black reel, the black cherries, the net cherries, and the white cherries are placed on the left reel. Because there are no black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry combinations, you can avoid the combination of black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry if you do not perform a stop operation within the draw range of 4 frames on the winning line where black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry can be combined. Even if the symbols that make up the special combination on the left reel stop on one of the winning lines, the special combination on the middle and right reels Symbol constructing the combined are spaced four or more intervals, for stopping operation position is not retracted the configuration pattern is present, can be avoided that a combination of special combination is aligned. As a result, even if any cherry or special role is elected by performing a stop operation with an operation procedure that avoids the combination of black cherry, net cherry, white cherry, or special roles, It is possible to avoid the end of RT (2) due to the winning of a cherry or special role.

  As a result, even after the start of RT (2), even if the falling combination is won, the player performs a stop operation at an operation procedure that avoids the winning combination of the falling combination, that is, at a timing outside the pull-in range of the combination of the falling combination. That is, since RT (2) can be continued by the technical intervention of the player, the interest associated with RT (2) can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, for each area of the left reel, there is an area where the “black cherry” symbol, “net cherry” symbol or “white cherry” symbol is drawn on one of the winning lines. There is no area where it is possible to avoid drawing a symbol, “net cherry” symbol or “white cherry” symbol on the winning line. That is, there is no stop operation position on the winning line for any of the “black cherry” symbol, “net cherry” symbol, or “white cherry” symbol. ”And“ White Cherry ”symbols cannot be stopped on the winning line, so if any cherry is selected during RT (2), it is not possible to intentionally remove the cherry if the type is not known. Yes, you will miss the winning cherries with a probability of 2/3, but if the winning cherries win with a probability of 1/3 and no special role has been won, RT (2 ) Will end. As a result, the operating procedure for avoiding winnings varies depending on the type of fallen combination, and there is no common avoidance procedure for all types of fallen combinations. Thus, it is determined whether or not RT (2) continues depending on whether or not it is hit, and the interest associated with RT (2) can be further enhanced.

  In addition, black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries that fall are accompanied by payout of three or less medals, which is the number of medals necessary to set the maximum bet number (3) that can be set for one game. Because it is a prize (with a maximum of two payouts), even if avoiding a falling role, the player will not suffer a major disadvantage, and the winning probability of black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry The payout rate of the machine 1 is not greatly affected.

  In addition, the black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries that fall are likely to be won at the same time as BB (1), so the faller won a prize during RT (2) and the end condition of RT (2) is Even if it is established, there is a possibility that BB (1) is won at the same time. Therefore, even if the termination condition for RT (2) is established, BB (1) can be expected to be won.

  Also, if any special role is won in RT (2), even if one of the cherries wins, if one of the cherries wins if the selected special role is not won, Since RT (2) will not end until the specified number of games is reached, during this period, if any cherries are won, the winning cherries will be awarded to win the special role. Since more medals can be earned compared to, the number of medals that can be earned afterwards when compared to when not winning, if any special role is won during RT (2) Can be increased.

  The sub CPU 91a performs the RT (2) effect at RT (2). RT (2) production is a falling role that informs that a falling role or a watermelon has been won when a falling role (black cherry, net cherry, white cherry) is won or a watermelon is won in RT (2). Winning notification, a fall that notifies the type of the winning combination (type of the falling combination specified from the internal winning flag) when the falling combination (black cherry, net cherry, white cherry) is won during RT (2) Includes role type notification.

  The falling role type notification indicates that the black cherry has been won, the net cherry has been won, the white cherry has been won, the color or pattern that suggests that win (black, black to indicate that the black cherry has been won, When the net cherry indicates that it has been won, it is indicated by shading, and when the white cherry indicates that it has been won, white) is notified, thereby informing the type of the falling role.

  Note that the fallen role type notification is not limited as long as the player can recognize the type of the fallen role, and the type of the fallen role itself, or the combination of symbols, the symbols that differ depending on the type of fallen role, It may be notified by displaying an image or the like suggesting the type on the liquid crystal display 51, or by turning on a corresponding LED, outputting a corresponding sound, or the like. Furthermore, a symbol that is an index of a different symbol depending on the type of the falling role (such as a symbol that is located near the constituent symbol of the falling role and stands out from the constituent symbol of the falling role), an image that suggests the index symbol, etc. You may make it alert | report.

  The sub CPU 91a executes a falling combination notification lottery to determine whether or not to execute the falling combination type notification during CB, BB (1) and RT (1) (2), and wins the falling combination notification lottery. In such a case, the number of falling combination notifications is determined, and the determined number of falling combination notifications is set in the RAM 91c. In addition, when the winning combination lottery is won while the number of falling combination notifications remains in the RAM 91c, the newly determined number of falling combination notifications is added to the number of falling combination notifications remaining in the RAM 91c. Then, in the state where no special combination is won in RT (2), when any cherry is won, it is determined whether or not the falling combination notification count remains, and the falling combination notification count remains. If there is, the falling role type notification corresponding to the winning cherry is executed. In other words, when a black cherry is won, a falling role type notification that notifies black that indicates the winning of black cherry is executed, and when a net cherry is won, a falling role that notifies of the shading that indicates the winning of net cherry is notified. The type notification is executed, and when the white cherry is won, the falling role type notification for notifying the white indicating the winning of the white cherry is executed. In addition, when any special combination is won in RT (2), when any cherry is won, the number of falling combination notification is decremented by one every time the falling combination type notification is executed once. Therefore, when any of the cherries wins within the range in which the falling combination notification count remains, the falling combination type notification is executed. In RT (2), when no special role has been won and there is no remaining falling role notification count, when either of the falling roles wins or the watermelon wins, the falling role wins. Announcement is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, if any cherry wins in a state where no special combination is won in RT (2), it is before the specified number of games is reached from the start of RT (2). RT (2) will end, but as described above, the black reel, net cherry, and white cherry that make up the black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry symbols. Since it cannot be intentionally stopped on the winning line, if any cherry is selected in the state where no special role is won in RT (2), the cherry is intentionally unclear. It is impossible to remove the cherries, and the winning cherries will be missed with a probability of 2/3, but the winning cherries will win with a probability of 1/3, and RT (2) will end. It becomes Rukoto.

  On the other hand, when any special combination is not won in RT (2), when any of the cherries wins, if the fallen combination type notification is executed, the player is notified of the color or pattern notified. It is possible to recognize which combination of black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries has been won by the color or pattern suggested by the It is possible to specify a stop operation position at which the “black cherry” symbol, the “net cherry” symbol, and the “white cherry” symbol are not intentionally stopped on the winning line.

  For this reason, in the state where no special combination is won in RT (2), if any cherry is won, the fallen combination type notification is executed, so that the player is notified of the color or The pattern makes it possible to recognize the type of cherry that has been won, and as a result, it is possible to know the operating procedure for avoiding winning of a cherry that may have been won. By spilling, it is possible to avoid the end of RT (2) accompanying the winning of the cherry and continue RT (2).

  In addition, the player does not always have to practice the operation procedure for avoiding the winning of the falling role in RT (2), and the operating procedure for avoiding the winning of the falling role is performed only when the falling role type notification is executed. Since it only has to be performed, the burden on the player in RT (2) can be reduced.

  Moreover, since the falling combination type notification is executed when the number of falling combination notifications remains, the number of games that RT (2) continues can be greatly varied depending on the number of falling combination notifications, so RT (2). The interest that accompanies can be further enhanced. In the present embodiment, the number of games continued by RT (2) is changed by executing the falling combination type notification when the number of falling combination notifications remains, but at the time of winning the falling combination The number of games continued by RT (2) may be changed by changing the execution probability of the falling combination type notification.

  In addition, as described above, there is no stop operation position that can be aimed at the same cherry and “7” symbol at the same time on the left reel. By performing the left reel stop operation, the winning color or pattern cherries will not win, and the end of RT (2) can be avoided. That is, in the falling role type notification, in addition to notifying of the type of the falling role won by the suggested color or pattern, the position serving as an index when avoiding winning of the falling role is also notified. ing.

  In the present embodiment, RT (2) will not end even if any cherry wins in the state where any special role is won in RT (2), so either one in RT (2) After winning the special role, you can win more medals by winning black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries. However, as mentioned above, Since the “Black Cherry”, “Net Cherry” and “White Cherry” designs cannot be intentionally stopped on the winning line, these black cherries, It is impossible to intentionally win net cherries or white cherries. If you win these roles, you can win with a probability of 1/3, but with a probability of 2/3. Resulting in spilled.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 91a notifies that the special combination is won at a rate of 1/2 when any special combination is won during RT (2), and any special combination is carried over. When one of the cherries wins in a state where the winning of the special role is notified, the falling role type notification is executed regardless of whether or not the number of falling role notifications remains. Yes. For this reason, when any special combination is elected in RT (2) and the special combination is notified, either black cherry, net cherry or white cherry is selected In addition, it is possible to recognize the winning combination, and it is possible to win all the winning black cherries, net cherries and white cherries. In addition, even if the special role is elected, in the state where the fact is not notified, it is controlled in the same manner as the state where the special role is not elected, that is, if the number of falling combination notices remains If the falling combination type notification is executed and the number of falling combination notifications does not remain, the falling combination winning notification is executed when any falling combination or watermelon is won, so RT Even in the state where the winning of the special role is not notified in (2), the player can always have a sense of expectation for the winning of the special role.

  Also, in this embodiment, when no special role is won in RT (2) and there is no remaining falling role notification count, when any falling role is won or a watermelon is won In addition, by executing the falling combination winning notification, the winning of either the cherry or watermelon is notified by the falling combination winning notification, and the timing at which the left reel can be aimed at the same time as the watermelon, In other words, it becomes possible to prompt the stop operation at a timing when the “Black 7” symbol constituting the BB (1) that may be won simultaneously with the falling combination cannot be drawn into the winning line, and the “Black 7” symbol is drawn. If a net cherry or a white cherry is pulled in without a win and a net cherry or a white cherry wins, the winning of BB (1) that may be won simultaneously is denied. Since it is possible to prevent the put away, it is possible to avoid the problem of winning things at special role that small role that may be simultaneous winning is winning is no longer be expected.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a, in the normal gaming state, "black 7 / net 7 / white 7 / watermelon-black 7 / net" excluding "black 7-black 7-black 7" and "black 7-black 7-white 7". 7 / White 7 / Watermelon-Black 7 // White 7 / Watermelon ”when the winning line is aligned, that is, when the watermelon is winning or when the chance line is aligned with any winning line , Special role and small role, replay (2) lottery probability is the same as the normal gaming state, but replay (1) winning probability is higher than the normal gaming state, and medal payout rate per game Is controlled to a replay time (3) (RT (3)) that becomes 1 or less. Then, RT (3) will not win any special role and will not win replay (2) and will reach the specified number of games (5 games in this embodiment) or before reaching the specified number of games. Either special role is won and the process proceeds to RT (4), which will be described later, or replay (2) wins and the process proceeds to RT (2).

  Also, when any special role is won in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (3) (including the case where a special role is won at the same time as a small role), or any special role in RT (2) After winning the game, when the RT (2) is completed by reaching the specified number of games, the draw probability of the small role and the replay (2) is the same as the normal game state, but the replay (1) is won. The replay time (4) (RT (4)) is controlled so that the probability is higher than the normal gaming state and the medal payout rate per game is 1 or less. Then, RT (4) ends when the winning special combination wins and moves to BB or CB. Note that RT (2) has no specified number of games, and once it has shifted, it continues until the special combination wins.

  In this way, when any special combination is won (including the case where one special combination is won at the same time), the transition to RT (4) where the winning probability of the re-playing combination is higher than in the normal gaming state. In addition, when a re-gamer and a special role are won at the same time, control is performed so that the combination of symbols constituting the re-gamer is preferentially drawn into the winning line over the combination of symbols constituting the special role. Even if a special role is elected, it is difficult to find a combination of symbols that make up the special role, making it difficult to determine whether or not the special role is won. It is possible to effectively maintain the player's expectation.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when any of the watermelons that are likely to have won special roles in the normal gaming state wins, or when the chances are aligned with any of the winning lines, a maximum of 5 games The transition to RT (3) where the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than in the normal gaming state over time, and RT (3) triggered by the fact that watermelon wins or chances are aligned on any winning line. ) Or RT (4), even if a special role has been won, it is difficult to determine the combination of symbols that make up the special role, making it difficult to determine whether the special role has been won. In addition, it is possible to effectively maintain the player's expectation for the possibility of winning the special role suggested by having a chance line on any winning line.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 91a executes a continuous effect over five games when a watermelon wins in the normal gaming state or RT (1), or when chances are aligned on any winning line. A continuous production is performed that leads to a production result indicating whether or not one of the special roles is won.

  There are two types of continuous effects, continuous effects A and B, and the sub CPU 91a continues when the watermelon is won in the normal gaming state or RT (1), or when the chances are aligned with one of the winning lines. An effect selection lottery is performed, and either of the continuous effects A and B is selected. At this time, the sub CPU 91a selects one of the continuous effects A and B at a different rate according to the set value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17A, in the continuous effect A, the setting values are in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, that is, the setting values are higher (setting values advantageous to the player). It is selected at a high rate, and the continuous performance B is selected at a higher rate as the setting values are in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, that is, the setting values are lower (setting values that are disadvantageous for the player). It has become. Further, in the situation where the game history as a result of the past game is disadvantageous for the player, the continuous performance A is selected at a higher rate than the situation where the game history is advantageous for the player. The game history is, for example, the number of games from the previous BB or CB, the payout rate of medals in a certain period, the number of special winnings, etc. The disadvantageous situation for the player is, for example, There are situations where the number of games from BB or CB exceeds the standard number of games, the medal payout rate for a certain period is below the standard payout rate, and the number of special role winnings is below the standard number of times .

  The sub CPU 91a executes a result notification effect for a certain time after the continuous effect selection lottery, and performs a result notification indicating whether the continuous effect A is finally selected or the continuous effect B is selected. In addition, when the continuous effect B is selected by the continuous effect selection lottery, the continuous effect B is executed after the result notification. On the other hand, when the continuous effect A is selected, after the result notification, the next The sub game is executed during the period until the bet number of the game is set, and either one of the continuous effects A or B is executed according to the result. In addition, after a continuous production selection lottery, when a certain time has elapsed, that is, before the result notification, the bet number setting operation or the credit or bet number adjustment operation is performed and the result notification effect is canceled halfway Regardless of which of the continuous effects A and B is selected, the result notification indicating that the continuous effect B is selected is performed, and then the continuous effect B is executed.

  The sub game includes a pseudo reel game and a touch game, and the player can select one of them.

  The pseudo reel game is a game in which the pseudo reel displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is pushed. The sub CPU 91a first displays the three pseudo reels in a stopped state on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51 in the pseudo reel game. In this state, when the operation of the start switch 7 is determined based on the operation detection command, the pseudo reel is changed. After the change, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is determined based on the operation detection command, thereby corresponding pseudo reel. And the display result is derived. When the display results are derived for all the pseudo reels, it is determined whether or not a specific symbol combination (for example, chance-chance-chance) has been prepared. Executes the continuous effect A, and executes the continuous effect B when the combination of specific symbols is not complete.

  Further, after the pseudo reel game is started, the sub CPU 91a does not operate the start switch 7 or operates the start switch 7, but does not operate the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and does not operate the pseudo reel game. Even if the bet number setting operation or credit or bet settlement operation is performed in the middle of the game and the pseudo reel game is stopped, the continuous effect B is performed as in the case where a specific symbol combination is not prepared in the pseudo reel game. Execute.

  The touch game is a game in which a player obtains a score by operating the touch panel according to the content displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the sub CPU 91a receives the score obtained in the sub game at the end of the sub game. It is determined whether or not the value is equal to or greater than the specified value. If the value is equal to or greater than the specified value, the continuous effect A is executed, and if it is less than the specified value, the continuous effect B is executed.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a cancels the touch game when the touch game is finished without any touch panel operation in the touch game or when the betting number setting operation or the credit or betting amount adjustment operation is performed before the touch game is finished. Even if the touch game score is less than the specified value, the continuous effect B is executed.

  In the continuous performance B, one of the characters a to e is the main character. When the sub CPU 91a executes the continuous performance A, the sub CPU 91a performs a character selection lottery and selects any one of the characters a to e as the main character. At this time, the sub CPU 91a selects any of the characters a to e at different ratios according to the set value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17 (b), the character a has a higher set value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, that is, a higher set value (a set value advantageous to the player). The character b is selected at a higher rate when the set value is even than the odd number, and the character c is selected at a higher rate when the set value is odd than when the set value is odd. d is selected only when the setting value is 6, that is, the highest setting (the most advantageous setting for the player), and the character e is set in the order of the setting values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6; The lower the value (a setting value that is disadvantageous for the player), the higher the ratio is selected.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the ratio in which the character a and the character e are main characters in the continuous performance A differs according to the set value, and the setting that is advantageous for the player if the ratio of the character a is high and the ratio of the character e is low. If the ratio of the character e is high and the ratio of the character a is low, there is a high possibility that the setting value is disadvantageous for the player. For this reason, it becomes possible to guess a setting value from the frequency in which the character a and the character b become the main characters in the continuous performance A.

  In the conventional slot machine, an effect that suggests a set value is performed at the time of winning a BB. Generally, the lower the set value, the lower the appearance rate of the BB. Thus, the set value is triggered by the BB win. If the BB is not awarded for a while, the player decides that the set value is low before suggesting the set value and stops the game. In spite of having a function that suggests a set value, it is difficult to sufficiently maintain the player's willingness to continue the game in order to guess the set value.

  On the other hand, in this example, it is suggested that when a watermelon wins, or when chances are aligned to any of the winning lines, that is, there is a possibility that a special role is won in the normal gaming state. Regardless of whether the special role is won or not, a continuous performance A that suggests the set value is executed, so it is possible to guess the set value without waiting for the special role winning or special role winning In addition, the character a and the character e are not always selected in the continuous effect A, and even if the character a and the character e are selected, the continuous effect A is only executed once or twice. The set value cannot be determined, and in order to be sure of the estimated set value, it is necessary to consider the character selection rate in a considerable number of continuous effects B. Special Even if the role has continued for the state not to win, in order to guess the set value, it is possible to effectively sustain the willingness of the player to try to continue the game.

  In addition, the continuous production A in which the set value is suggested is based on the condition that the continuous production A is selected in the continuous production selection lottery when the watermelon wins or when the chances are aligned with any winning line. Since the continuous effect A is selected at a higher rate as the set value is higher, the execution frequency of the continuous effect A is relatively lower when the set value is lower than when the set value is high. Therefore, when the set value is low, it is necessary to stack more games until the set value is confident, and a high operating rate can be realized even when the set value is low.

  In addition, since the continuous performance A is selected at a different rate according to the game history, the setting value is suggested at a more preferable frequency according to the situation from the game history, that is, the player's past game result. Continuous production A can be executed. In particular, in this embodiment, in a situation where the game history is unfavorable for the player, the continuous performance A is selected at a higher rate than the situation where the game history is advantageous to the player. The situation that is disadvantageous to the player makes it easier to guess the set value. Even in such a situation, the player's willingness to continue the game can be effectively maintained in order to guess the set value. it can.

  Further, among the characters a to e, the characters a to c and e may be selected in all settings, but the character d is selected only when the set value is 6, that is, the highest set value. Since there is a possibility that the character d is the main character, the continuous production A is executed, so that the maximum setting value is determined. By having the character d that is determined to be the highest set value, the player's willingness to continue the game can be maintained more effectively.

  Character b is selected at a higher rate when the set value is odd than at an even number, and character c is selected at a higher rate when the set value is even than at an odd number. From the appearance frequency of the continuous production B in which the character b is the main character and the continuous production B in which the character c is the main character, it can be estimated to some extent whether the setting value is an odd setting or an even setting. The accuracy of the estimation can be increased, but if the continuous production B is not executed a considerable number of times, it cannot be determined whether the setting is an odd setting or an even setting. The player's willingness to continue can be maintained more effectively. Furthermore, the combination of the appearance frequency of the characters b and c and the appearance frequency of the characters a and e is complicated, and it becomes difficult to be sure because the suspicion occurs in the estimated allowable stage, thereby increasing the difficulty of setting estimation. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, the set value can be estimated according to the appearance frequency of the characters b and c among the plurality of characters. For example, a specific character varies depending on the set value during the continuous performance. It may be configured to appear at a ratio, and a setting value can be estimated according to the appearance frequency of a specific character.

  Also, in this embodiment, an effect in which the set value is suggested is triggered when the watermelon wins or when the chance line is aligned with any of the winning lines. It is only necessary that an effect that suggests a set value is executed without waiting for winning or winning a special role. For example, when a specific role other than the special role is won or won, or when the power is turned on. , After the end of BB or CB, etc., that the specified number of games has passed from a certain starting point, that the number of times that a specific role has been won or won from a certain starting point has reached the specified number, the payout rate of medals, An effect in which the set value is suggested may be executed when the increase number, the decrease number of medals, etc. reach the specified value. Even in such a case, the special role is not won. State There is even in the case where the state a special role is not winning has continued, in order to guess the set value, it is possible to effectively sustain the willingness of the player to try to continue the game.

  In addition, after the power is turned on, after BB or CB is finished, the specified number of games has passed from a certain starting point, the number of times that a specific role has been won or the number of winnings from a certain starting point has reached the specified number, When an effect that suggests a set value is triggered when the payout rate, the number of medals increased, or the number of medals decreased reaches a specified value, the set value is suggested using a driving tool. Unauthorized sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state in which the effect is likely to appear to the player at the start of the game shop operation, for example, may be carried out, and the fairness of the game may be impaired. In this way, it is possible to prevent such injustice by taking measures to prevent the use of the driving tool such as restricting the release of the connection of the connector by the connector restricting member.

  Further, in this embodiment, the continuous production A, that is, the production in which the set value is suggested, is selected at a higher rate as the set value is higher, but at least more advantageous than the set value having the highest advantage. The setting value with the lowest setting value only needs to produce an effect in which the setting value is suggested at a lower ratio. For example, the setting value is 3 or less than the setting value is 4 or less. The setting value is suggested at a lower rate when the setting value is an even setting value including the highest setting value than when the setting value is an odd setting value including the lowest setting value. You may make it perform the produced effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the continuous effect selection lottery, the result notification effect is executed for a predetermined time, and the result notification indicating whether the continuous effect A is finally selected or the continuous effect B is selected is performed. If the bet number setting operation or the credit or betting amount adjustment operation is performed before a certain time elapses, that is, before the result notification, the result notification effect is canceled halfway, for example, the continuous effect A is selected. Even if it is a case, the result notification which shows that the continuous production B was selected is performed, and the continuous production B is performed after that. As a result, after the start of the result notification effect, the set value is suggested on the condition that the result notification effect has ended after a certain period of time has elapsed without the betting number setting operation or the credit or betting amount adjustment operation being performed. Since the continuous effect A is executed, the player does not cancel the effect until the result notification effect ends in order to estimate the set value. Thereby, it becomes possible to increase the willingness of the player to execute the result notification effect to the end without canceling the result notification effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced to the extent originally intended by the result notification effect. On the other hand, if the betting number setting operation or credit or betting amount adjustment operation is performed, the result notification effect can be canceled, and the player can select whether to execute the result notification effect until the end. For a player who wants to advance the game ahead of making the setting guess, the game can be advanced.

  In this embodiment, after the start of the result notification effect, the set value is set on the condition that the result notification effect has ended after a certain period of time has elapsed without the betting number setting operation or the credit or betting number adjustment operation being performed. However, when the result notification effect ends without being canceled in the middle, there is an effect in which the set value is suggested at a higher rate than if it was canceled in the middle. The same effects as described above can be obtained as a configuration to be executed.

  In addition, the effect executed when the result notification effect ends without being canceled in the middle is not limited to the effect in which the set value is suggested, but information that is advantageous to the player when the player progresses the game ( For example, any effect may be used as long as the above-mentioned falling role type notification is notified.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the continuous effect A is selected in the continuous effect selection lottery, one sub game of the pseudo reel game or the touch game is executed. In the pseudo reel game, when a specific symbol combination can be arranged on the pseudo reel through the operation of the start switch 7 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, or in the touch game, the specified value is obtained through the operation of the touch panel. In contrast to the continuous effect A in which the set value is suggested when the above-mentioned specification is acquired, the start switch 7 is not operated or the start switch 7 is operated after the pseudo reel game is started. However, when the stop switch 8L, 8C, or 8R is not operated and the bet number setting operation or credit or bet settlement operation is performed during the pseudo reel game, When the touch game ends without any touch panel operation in the game or before the touch game ends When the touch game is stopped due to a betting number setting operation or a credit or betting amount adjustment operation, the continuous effect B is executed instead of the continuous effect A in which the set value is suggested. . That is, in order to infer the set value, it is necessary to actively operate the start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R and the touch panel that are not directly related to the game. Can increase the willingness to perform technical interventions that are not directly related to each other, so that it is possible to effectively utilize the functions that can be produced using these operation means.

  In this embodiment, after the pseudo reel game is started, the start switch 7 is not operated or the start switch 7 is operated, but the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated, and the pseudo reel game is not operated. In the middle of the game, when the bet number setting operation or credit or bet amount adjustment operation is performed, the pseudo reel game is stopped, or when the touch game is finished without any touch panel operation in the touch game, or the touch game If the touch game is canceled due to a betting number setting operation or a credit or betting amount adjustment operation before the end of the game, the continuous effect suggested by the setting value is not executed. When technical intervention is performed by operating the start switch 7 and stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, or touch When the technical intervention is performed through the operation of the touch panel in the system, an effect that suggests the set value is performed at a higher rate than when the technical intervention is not performed. Similar effects can be obtained.

  In addition, when the technical intervention is performed by operating the start switch 7 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the pseudo reel game, or when the technical intervention is performed through the operation of the touch panel in the touch game, The production is not limited to the production in which the set value is suggested, and any production in which information that is advantageous to the player when the player progresses the game (for example, the above-described drop role type notification) may be used.

  Also, in this embodiment, it is confirmed that the continuous performance A that suggests the set value has won a watermelon that may have won the special role, or that the chances are aligned on any winning line. Since it is executed as a trigger, the set value is suggested by the continuous performance A, and the possibility of winning the special role is also suggested, so that the expectation for the special role can be increased. Furthermore, since the continuous performance is executed in duplicate with the RT in which it is difficult to determine whether or not the special role is won, the result of the continuous performance, that is, whether or not the special role is won. It can be noticed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of combinations are determined in advance as the production patterns of each game constituting the continuous production regardless of the type of the continuous production. When the sub CPU 91a starts the continuous production, the sub CPU 91a selects the combination of the production patterns at a ratio according to whether or not the special combination is won. For example, if the ratio of the first combination selected from the first combination and the second combination is higher when the special combination is won than when the special combination is not selected, the first combination When the continuous effect is executed, the expectation for winning the special role can be enhanced as compared with the case where the continuous effect is executed with the second combination.

  On the other hand, even after the start of continuous production, even before the end, watermelons that may have been elected special roles may win or chances may be on any of the winning lines. In some cases, the possibility of winning a special role will increase, but if the combination of production patterns is determined in advance as described above, the watermelon will win or the chance line will be one of the winning lines Even if they are all together, there is no change in the flow of the continuous production, and the expectation of the special role by the continuous production does not change.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, after the start of continuous production, when a watermelon that may have won the special role has been won before the end, or the chances are aligned on any winning line Sometimes, the combination of production patterns that can be expected to win special roles rather than the combination of production patterns of continuous production currently being executed, that is, the ratio that is selected when a special role is won is higher than the current combination It changes to the combination of a high production pattern, and the remaining continuous production is performed based on the combination after a change. As a result, after a continuous production based on a combination of production patterns that indicate the possibility of winning a special role, especially a combination of production patterns that cannot be expected for special roles, a watermelon is awarded before the end. If there is a chance that all winning lines are aligned and the possibility of winning a special role is suggested, and the possibility increases, the content of the direct production will also be more than the current one Since it changes to the content which can be expected to win the special role, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the special role according to the event that occurred during the continuous performance.

  In this embodiment, after the start of continuous production, when a watermelon that may have won the special role has been won before the end of the performance, or when chances are aligned on any of the winning lines In addition, instead of the combination of production patterns of continuous production currently being executed, it is changed to a combination of production patterns that can be expected to win special roles, and the remaining continuous production is executed based on the changed combination. However, after the start of the continuous performance, when the watermelon that may have won the special role has been won before the end of the performance, or when the chance line is on any of the winning lines, the remaining For at least one game effect pattern (for example, the remaining one game effect pattern, etc.) among the continuous effects, the special role is won more than the combination of the effect patterns initially executed. It may be possible to change to a production pattern that corresponds to the combination of production patterns that can be waited for, and even in this case, after the continuous production that indicates the possibility of winning the special role starts, before it ends In addition, if there is a chance that the watermelon will win or if there is a chance line with any of the winning lines, there is a possibility that it will be elected as a special role, and if that possibility increases, there will also be a content of continuous production Since the content changes to a content that can be expected to win the special role, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the special role according to the event that occurred during the continuous performance.

  Next, a bonus effect that is executed when BB (2) or BB (3) wins will be described.

  When the BB (2) or BB (3) wins, the sub CPU 91a does not perform the winning notification effect as when the other combination wins, and further shifts to BB (2) and BB (3). Will continue to play the game state up to that point.

  Furthermore, the combination of BB (2) and BB (3) is composed of “bells” and “replays” that are smaller in size than conspicuous symbols such as “7” and more in number on each reel. In addition, it is composed of two or more types of symbols, making it difficult to understand that they are aligned with the winning line.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 18, when BB (2) or BB (3) wins and the game state shifts to BB (2) or BB (3), a prize notification lottery is performed in a notification period of up to three games, By winning the prize announcement lottery, a bonus notification effect is announced for notifying that the game has shifted to BB (2) or BB (3). If the winning lottery is not won during the notice period, the bonus notice effect is forcibly performed at the end of the three games.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a executes the first small role notification effect at a higher rate than the second small role notification effect when the small role is elected alone outside the notification period, whereas the sub CPU 91a is small in the notification period. When the winning combination is won, the second small role notification effect is executed at a higher rate than the first small role notification effect. In the notification period, the second small role notification effect is executed less frequently than the notification period. The second small role announcement effect is executed at a high frequency.

  After the bonus announcement effect, the first bonus effect is executed until the total number of payouts in BB exceeds 100, which is the end condition of BB (3), and the total payout number in BB exceeds 100. Then, the first bonus effect is finished. In the case of BB (3), the bonus effect is also terminated at the same time as the end of BB (3), whereas in the case of BB (2), any timing until the end of the next game ( Until the total number of payouts in BB exceeds 300, which is the ending condition for BB (2), is determined by lottery) The second bonus effect is executed, the second bonus effect is ended in a game in which the total number of payouts in the BB exceeds 300, and the bonus effect is ended with the end of BB (2).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when BB (2) or BB (3) wins, the game state up to that point is not performed, as in the case where CB and BB (1) wins. After the transition to BB (2) or BB (3), the fact that the transition to BB (2) or BB (3) was made by the bonus notification presentation until the end of the notification period Even if BB (2) or BB (3) has won a prize and has already shifted to BB (2) or BB (3), it is related to the prize. BB (2) or BB (3) can be recognized as having started without making it, and the player can be given surprises, so the transition to BB (2) or BB (3) It can effectively enhance the interest.

  The combination of BB (2) and BB (3) is composed of “bell” and “replay”, which are smaller in size than conspicuous symbols such as “7” and more in number on each reel. And it is composed of two or more kinds of symbols, and it becomes difficult to know that the winning line is aligned, so it becomes difficult to determine that BB (2) or BB (3) has won, and suddenly due to bonus announcement production It can be impressed that BB (2) or BB (3) has started.

  In addition, the transition to RB at the same time as the transition to BB (2) or BB (3) greatly increases the probability of winning a bell, so when the transition to BB (2) or BB (3) occurs, Because it is possible to recognize that the bonus announcement production has been executed after the sign state (notification period) of frequent winnings, even if Bell wins frequently, even if it wins by himself The expectation of the player can be increased.

  In addition, when a small role is elected alone outside the announcement period, the first small role announcement production is executed at a higher rate than the second small role announcement production, whereas the small role is elected during the announcement period. The second small role announcement effect is executed at a higher rate than the first small role notification effect, and the second frequency that is executed less than the notification period is low in the notification period. The small role notification effect is executed at a high frequency, and the player's expectation during the notification period can be effectively increased by accompanying the second small role notification effect.

  In addition, BB (2) and BB (3) differ in the number of payouts as an end condition, that is, the amount of medals that can be acquired during BB, and the combination of BB (2) and BB (3) as described above. Even if it is aligned with the winning line, it is difficult for the player to understand. After the bonus notification, the same first bonus effect is executed in BB (2) and BB (3) in the first bonus effect period. When the first bonus effect ends, it is difficult to determine whether or not the BB continues thereafter, and it is possible to effectively increase the expectation for the BB to continue in the next game.

  Also, if BB continues, there is a possibility that continuation notification may be made at multiple timings during the period until the next game ends, and it is not known when it will be notified, so it gives a moderate tension This makes it possible to effectively enhance the interest and maintain the expectation that the game will continue until the game ends.

  As described above, the first embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to the first embodiment, and the present invention can be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say, it is included.

  For example, in the first embodiment, as a reel stop control method, stop control (hereinafter also referred to as a table method) using a stop control table created from table creation data registered in advance in the ROM 41b is applied. In addition, it is possible to search for a retractable position at each stop operation timing, and apply stop control (hereinafter also referred to as a control method) based on the search result, or stop control by both the table method and the control method (hereinafter referred to as table + (Also called a control method) may be applied.

  Moreover, you may use these several systems together. For example, as a result of the internal lottery, by using both the table-type stop control and the control-type stop control according to the reel stop time (first stop, second stop, or third stop), As a result of all the internal lotteries, it is not necessary to prepare a stop control table in advance for all the stop times of the reels, so that the storage capacity of the stop control table can be reduced.

  In addition, depending on the timing of the stop operation, when a winning combination is missed, the stop control is performed by the table method using the stop control table for a relatively larger number of stopping times than when the winning combination is won. It is possible to diversify display results when a winning combination is won and the winning combination is missed.

  In particular, among the roles in which a special combination is missed, the display results when the special combination is missed can be diversified by performing stop control by the table method using the stop control table when the special combination is elected. In addition, even in the case of a loss that has not been won by any of the roles, it is possible to diversify the display results in the case of a loss by performing stop control using the table method using the stop control table. The degree of freedom in designing the display results that can appear both when winning a role and when not winning is expanded. That is, since the stop position in the case of losing can be limited by the stop control table, it is easy to adjust the stop position and the appearance ratio that are likely to be selected as a special role.

  On the other hand, when a role that does not miss is elected, the relationship with the display result when the special role is missed is weak. In other words, since a special role cannot be expected when a role that does not miss out appears, there is little need to diversify display results when a role that does not miss out is won. For this reason, when a winning combination that does not miss is won, stop control is effectively performed by performing stop control by a control method that does not use the stop control table for a relatively large number of stopping times than when winning a winning combination. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the table. That is, the display results can be varied according to the nature of the result of the internal lottery, and the storage capacity of the stop control table can be reduced.

  In addition, since the stop control is always performed in the table system for the first stop, the number of sliding symbols that will not stop from the stop control table selected when the special role is won is determined from the stop control table selected when the special role is not won. Control for deriving a reach (so-called 1st) that is established when a display result is derived for the first stop reel by selecting the registered stop control table and performing the first stop control. It becomes possible to design easily.

  In the first embodiment, even at RT (1), the medal payout rate per game exceeds 1. However, at RT (1), the expected increase rate of medals per game is 1 or less, Alternatively, the value of RT (2) can be relatively increased by doing in this way, so that the player to transition to RT (2) is controlled by RT (1). Can be further enhanced.

  Also, after RT (1) starts, when any special role is won, Replay (2) wins, and when moving to RT (2), any special role is not won and replay (2 ) Also ends RT (1) when the specified number of games is reached without winning, but when any special role is won, Replay (2) wins and RT (2) When transitioning to, when a falling combination wins, any special combination is not won, replay (2), and when the specified number of games is reached without winning any falling combination, RT (1) is terminated. Alternatively, RT (1) is not provided with the specified number of games, and after RT (1) starts, when any special role is won, Replay (2) wins and RT (2) RT (1) will be terminated when transitioning to or when the faller wins a prize It may be.

  Also, the transition to RT (1) is made after the end of CB and BB (1), but the transition may be made to RT (1) after the end of one of the bonuses. For example, after either or both of BB (2) and BB (3) are finished, the transition to RT (1) may be made, or RT (1) different from the transition role of RT (2) You may make it transfer to RT (1) when the combination of a transfer combination is prepared.

  In the first embodiment, after RT (2) starts, if any special role is won before reaching the specified number of games, RT (2) is not terminated and any special role is RT (2) is ended when winning, when one of the cherries, that is, when the falling role wins, or when the specified number of games is reached without winning the special role or falling role, RT (2) may not be provided with the prescribed number of games, and after RT (2) starts, RT (2) may be terminated when any special combination wins or when a falling combination wins. . In addition, after RT (2) is started without any falling combination, RT (2) is ended when any special combination wins or when the specified number of games is reached without winning any special combination You may make it let it.

  In addition, in the state where any special role is elected, RT (2) will not end even if a fallen role wins during RT (2), but any special role will be elected. Regardless of whether or not the player falls down during RT (2), RT (2) may be terminated.

  In addition, a winning procedure for any type of falling combination is always assigned to all operating procedures that can be operated by the player, and an operating procedure for avoiding winning of any type of falling combination is included. However, by including a winning procedure for at least one other type of falling role, there is no common avoidance procedure for all types of falling roles. A configuration in which part or all of them are common may be used.

  Furthermore, an operation procedure that avoids winnings may be provided for all the falling combinations for all the operation procedures that can be operated by the player. In such a case, it is ensured by the technical intervention of the player. RT (2) can be continued up to the prescribed number of games. In this case, it is preferable to provide an operation procedure that can avoid both the special combination and the fallen combination. By doing so, both the special combination and the fallen combination can be avoided by a common operation procedure.

  Further, at the time when the falling combination wins at RT (2), the game shifts from the next game to the normal gaming state. For example, the number of games shorter than the prescribed number of games of RT (2) (for example, one game) If a special RT transition combination that ends in step) is applied and the falling combination wins, the special RT transition may be made to transition to the normal gaming state.

  In addition, the winning probabilities of all types of falling roles are the same probability, but different winning probabilities may be obtained depending on the types of falling roles, and in this way, the type with the highest winning probability in the normal gaming state. By performing the stop operation in the winning combination procedure of the falling combination, the medal payout rate in the normal gaming state can be increased, and during RT (2), the stopping operation is performed by the avoidance procedure of the type of falling combination having a high winning probability. By performing the above, it is possible to increase the probability of avoiding the end of RT (2). That is, since the difference in the player's advantage depends on whether or not the player performs technical intervention, the interest can be enhanced.

  In addition, by placing the symbols that make up the falling combination beyond the drawing range, it is possible to avoid winning the falling combination by performing a reel stop operation at a timing outside the drawing range. A different reel stop order for avoiding winnings is determined for multiple falling combinations, and when any of the falling combinations wins, the winning determined according to the type of the falling combination is avoided. When a stop operation is performed in the order of stopping the reels for the purpose, control is performed so that the falling combination is missed, and if the stop operation is performed in a different order from the stop order of the reels to avoid the winning, The winning combination may be awarded, and in this way, it is possible to prevent the falling winning prize from being won by a relatively simple technical intervention. In this case, it is preferable that other small roles are elected at the same time as the fallen role, and when the fallen role is missed, the other small roles that are elected at the same time win the prize. Even if a fallen role is missed, a small role can win and a medal can be obtained.

  In the first embodiment, a slot machine for setting bets using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a slot machine for setting bets using game balls, It may be a full credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in a game ball, and a take-in ball that detects a game ball taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 34c, a ball payout device for paying out game balls, a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls payed out by the ball payout device It is possible to set a bet number using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out when a prize is generated.

  Second Embodiment A slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. The configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, and therefore, different points will be mainly described here.

  In the first embodiment described above, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1) to (4), RB, and CT, whereas in this embodiment, the gaming state is the initial gaming state, RT (5) to (7) It consists of RB and CT.

  The initial gaming state is a gaming state other than RB, RT (5) to (7), after any BB or CB is finished, after a setting change, after RT (5) is finished, and RT (6) is finished. Then, after RT (7) ends. RB and CT are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  In this embodiment, when the replay (1) or Bell wins in the initial gaming state (excluding the state where any special part is elected), the special part (only when the special part is not carried over) and The lottery probability of a small role is the same as the initial gaming state, but the replay time (5) in which the lottery probability of replay (2) is higher than the initial gaming state and the medal payout rate per game is less than 1. ) (RT (5)). RT (5) is a specified number of games without winning any special role (in this embodiment, if RT (5) is transferred by replay (1) winning 200 games, RT transferred by bell winning If (5), 100 games) are reached, or one of the special roles is won before reaching the specified number of games, the game ends.

  In addition, when any of the black cherries, net cherries, or white cherries wins in the initial gaming state (except when any special part is elected), the special part (only if the special part is not carried over) ) And the small lottery probability is the same as the initial game state, but the replay (1) lottery probability is higher than the initial game state, and the payout rate of medals per game exceeds one (1) 6) Control to (RT (6)). RT (6) reaches the specified number of games (100 games in this embodiment) without winning any special role, or wins any special role before reaching the specified number of games. It comes to end with.

  RT (6) can be shifted only from the initial gaming state, and even if any of black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries wins during RT (5), the transition is made to RT (6). Once it is controlled to RT (5), RT (5) ends and then RT (6) is reached until either black cherry, net cherry or white cherry wins in the initial gaming state. There is no migration.

  Also, replay (2) in the initial gaming state (excluding the state where any special part is elected), RT (5), RT (6) (excluding the state where any special part is elected) When winning a prize, the lottery probability of special roles (only when special roles are not carried over) and small roles are the same as the initial gaming state, but the lottery probability of replay (1) is higher than the initial gaming state And the replay time (7) (RT (7)) in which the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 1 is controlled. While the gaming state is in RT (7), RT (7) continues until any special combination is won, and ends by winning any special combination.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the initial gaming state (excluding the state where any special role is won), that is, after the end of BB or CB, after the setting change, after the end of RT (5) or RT (6) In the gaming state after the end of, there is a possibility that both RT (5) where an increase in medals cannot be expected and RT (6) where an increase in medals can be expected. For this reason, once transitioning to RT (6) from the initial gaming state, an opportunity to transition to RT (6) again is provided even after RT (6) is completed, and RT (6) is periodically controlled. It becomes possible to do. On the other hand, when transitioning from the initial gaming state to RT (5), there is no transition to RT (6) until the end of the RT (5), but when RT (5) ends, the initial gaming state is entered again. Even in such a case, an opportunity to periodically shift to RT (6) will come. In other words, the initial gaming state functions as a chance zone that may shift to RT (6) where an increase in medals can be expected, and even if such a chance zone shifts to RT (5), it shifts to RT (6). Even if you do, you will visit periodically.

  In addition, in the initial gaming state, if any of black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry wins, the game moves to RT (6) where an increase in medals can be expected. Since the stop operation cannot be performed simultaneously with the “black cherry” symbol, “net cherry” symbol, and “white cherry” symbol of the left reel that constitutes the If you don't know the type, you wo n’t be able to win the winning cherries, and you wo n’t be able to win the winning cherries with a 1/3 chance. Yes, but you won't be able to move to RT (6) in this case because you missed the winning cherry with a probability of 2/3.

  As described above, in the slot machine according to the present embodiment, after RT (6) where an increase in medals can be expected, if any special role is won before reaching the specified number of games, RT RT (6) is terminated when any special combination wins without finishing (6), or when the specified number of games is reached without winning any special combination. After the start of (6), even if any special role is elected before reaching the specified number of games, if the elected special role does not win, RT (6) will end with the election of the special role Without winning the winning special role, it is possible to continue to control RT (6) until the specified number of games is reached, so even if the special role is won in RT (6) If the winning special role is not awarded, Until it reaches the number of games it is possible to digest the RT (6), there is no possibility that would give a loss feeling to the player.

  In addition, since the winning flag of the special role is carried over after the next game until the special role is won, after the RT (6) reaches the specified number of games, the special role won during that time is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the special role at the end of RT (6).

  Further, in the initial gaming state, there is a possibility of shifting to RT (6) which is advantageous for a player who can expect an increase in medals by winning one of black cherry, net cherry or white cherry, while replay ( 1) If any of the bells wins, an increase in medals cannot be expected, and there is a possibility that the player may move to RT (5), which is disadvantageous for a player who does not move to RT (6). When the replay (1) and the bell are won in the initial game state, the game moves to RT (5), which is disadvantageous for the player. However, when RT (5) is completed, the game is shifted to the initial game state again. For this reason, even if the transition is made to RT (5) without shifting to RT (6) in the initial gaming state, the transition is made to the initial gaming state again, so there is a possibility of periodically shifting to RT (6). The initial gaming state will come, and the player's expectation for RT (6) can be maintained.

  In the initial gaming state, when any of black cherries, net cherries, or white cherries is won, the operating procedure matches the winning conditions for the selected cherries, that is, the pull-in range of combinations of black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries. Since the player can perform the stop operation at the internal timing, that is, the game can be shifted to RT (6) by the player's technical intervention, the interest in the initial game state can be enhanced. At this time, the operation procedure as a winning condition varies depending on the type of cherry, and since there is no common winning procedure for all types of cherries, the player guesses which type of cherries was won, Whether or not to shift to RT (6) is determined depending on whether or not the game is won, and the interest in the initial gaming state can be further enhanced.

  In addition, even if the replay (1) or bell wins in the initial gaming state and the transition to RT (5) where no increase in medals can be expected, an increase in medals can be expected in RT (5) and either RT (5) for which an increase in medals cannot be expected because the winning probability of replay (2), which will continue to RT (7), which continues until the special role is won, is higher than the initial gaming state and RT (6) Even in the case of shifting to, the player's expectation for shifting to RT (7) can be enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 91a sets the set value on the condition that the number of games digested has reached the specified number of games after the start of RT (5), which is disadvantageous to the player, that is, the end of RT (5). The suggestion is executed. Thus, the player's willingness to continue the game can be maintained until RT (5), which is a disadvantageous state for the player and the player is likely to end the game, is ended.

  In this embodiment, an effect that suggests a set value is executed on the condition that RT (5) is disadvantageous for the player, but after RT (5) is disadvantageous for the player, After a certain number of games have elapsed, an effect that suggests a set value may be executed at a higher rate than before, in which case the player is in a disadvantageous state and the player Even if RT (5) is likely to end the game, the player's willingness to continue the game can be maintained up to a certain number of games, and then RT (5) ends. Since the number of games up to is less than that at the beginning of RT (5), the player's willingness to continue the game can be maintained until RT (5) ends.

  As described above, the second embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the second embodiment, and changes and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment has the same effect as that described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example illustrated for the first embodiment is also applicable to the second embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, the lottery probability of replay (2) is increased at RT (5). However, it is sufficient that at least the combined probability of replay (1) and replay (2) is increased. The lottery probability of 1) may be increased, or the lottery probability of both replay (1) and replay (2) may be increased. Furthermore, although the lottery probability of one type of replay decreases, even if the lottery probability of the other type of replay increases, the combined probability of replay (1) and replay (2) increases as a result. good.

  In addition, the replay (1) lottery probability is increased in RT (6), but it is sufficient that at least the combined probability of replay (1) and replay (2) is increased. The probability may be increased, or the lottery probability of both replay (1) and replay (2) may be increased. Furthermore, although the lottery probability of one type of replay decreases, even if the lottery probability of the other type of replay increases, the combined probability of replay (1) and replay (2) increases as a result. good.

  Also, replay (2) in the initial gaming state (excluding the state where any special part is elected), RT (5), RT (6) (excluding the state where any special part is elected) Is controlled to RT (7) when winning a prize, but is controlled to RT (7) when replay (2) wins only in any specific gaming state (for example, the initial gaming state). In this way, by controlling to a specific gaming state in this way, it is possible to effectively enhance the player's expectation to move to RT (7).

  A third embodiment of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. The configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, and therefore, different points will be mainly described here.

  In the first embodiment described above, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), RB, and CT, whereas in this embodiment, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, and the single bonus (hereinafter referred to as a single bonus). , SB), RT (8), RB, and CT.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the CB and BB (1) to (3) of the first embodiment described above as special roles, single bonuses (1) to (3) (hereinafter referred to as SB (1) to (3)) Designated). SB (1) is awarded when the combination of “Net 7-Replay-Replay” is aligned on any winning line in the normal gaming state or SB, and SB (2) is either in the normal gaming state or SB. SB (3) is a combination of “Black 7-Replay-Replay” on any winning line in the normal gaming state or SB when the combination of “White 7-Replay-Replay” is complete Wins when you have the right.

  If any of SB (1) to (3) wins in the normal gaming state and SB, only one game is controlled to SB where the winning probability of the bell is slightly increased.

  In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state and SB, SB (1) + black cherry, SB (2) + net cherry, SB (3) + white cherry are targeted for internal lottery, black cherry, net cherry, white Cherry and SB (1) to (3) are not subject to internal lottery alone. In RT (8), which is shifted by winning either CB or BB (1), black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry are subject to internal lottery alone, and SB (1) to (3) Special roles including are excluded from the internal lottery.

  Of the small roles, the winning probability of black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry (including the case of simultaneous winning with SB (1) to (3)) is any of the normal gaming state, SB, and RT (8). The same is true in the gaming state, and the winning probability of the bell is slightly higher in SB than in the normal gaming state and RT (8).

  SB (1) to (3) are special roles, but unlike CB and BB (1), the winning flag is effective only in the winning game, and SB (1) to (3) are won. However, even if the prize cannot be won, it will not be carried over to the next game.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry are paid out at the time of winning a prize (one to match the two winning lines). , Net cherries and white cherries are paid out at the time of winning 15 prizes.

  In the present embodiment, when SB (1) + black cherry is won, priority is given to the control for aligning SB (1), which is a special role, with the winning lines L1 to L5 over SB (1). It is possible to win black cherries only when it is not possible to withdraw. For this reason, the area numbers 1 to 7 of the left reel are the drawing range of “black cherry” that constitutes the black cherry, and among these, the area number 5 that is the drawing range of the “net 7” that constitutes SB (1). When operated at the timing of ˜7, “black cherry” is not drawn into the winning lines L1 to L5, but “net 7” is drawn, and the winning of black cherries is limited.

  When SB (2) + net cherry is selected, priority is given to the control of aligning SB (2), which is a special role, with winning lines L1 to L5 over net cherry, and SB (2) cannot be drawn Only the net cherry can be awarded. For this reason, the area numbers 0 and 15 to 20 of the left reel are the pull-in range of “net cherry” constituting the net cherry, and among these, the area that is the pull-in range of “white 7” constituting SB (2) When operated at the timings of numbers 0, 19, and 20, “net cherry” is not drawn into the pay lines L1 to L5, but “white 7” is drawn, and net cherry wins are restricted. Become.

  When SB (3) + white cherry is elected, priority is given to the control of aligning SB (3), which is a special role, with winning lines L1 to L5 over white cherry, and SB (3) cannot be drawn It is only possible to win a white cherry. For this reason, the area numbers 8 to 14 of the left reel are the drawing range of “white cherry” that constitutes the white cherry, and among these, the area number 12 that is the drawing range of “black 7” that constitutes SB (3). When operated at the timing of ˜14, “white cherry” is not drawn into the pay lines L1 to L5, but “black 7” is drawn, and the winning of white cherry is restricted.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when any of the cherries is won in the normal gaming state or in the SB, the cherry pull-in is restricted by the SB that is won at the same time. In addition, in SB (1) to (3), since “replay” that is not missed is applied as the configuration symbol of the middle reel and the right reel, the stop operation of the left reel is performed regardless of the stop order of the reels. Will be limited by the SB that is won at the same time. On the other hand, in RT (8), since the cherries are won by themselves, the SB winning is not limited in the pulling of cherries. In RT (8), either CB or BB (1) is always elected, so cherry pull-in will be limited by the elected special role, but in this case, it was elected By stopping the middle reel or the right reel before the left reel outside the drawing range of the special symbols, it is possible to prevent the cherry from being restricted by the selected special role.

  In this embodiment, the expected payout value per game in the normal gaming state (the average value of the payout number per game, that is, the winning probability of each role × the total value of the payout number of the role) is less than 3, Since the number of bets required to start the game in the gaming state is 3, the number of medals decreases, and the payout rate of medals per game is less than 1. In addition, in SB, the winning probability of the bell is slightly higher than in the normal gaming state, so the expected payout per game is slightly higher, but it is still less than 3, and the medal is decreased per game. The medal payout rate is less than 1.

  In the normal gaming state and SB, black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry cannot simultaneously aim for the symbols constituting these roles, and the substantial appearance rate becomes 1/3, and the above-mentioned As black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries are elected at the same time as any single bonus, and the pull-in is limited by the single bonus that is won, the appearance rate of cherries is further reduced, making it a substantial game The expected payout value per game, the actual payout rate per game, is further reduced.

  In this way, in SB, the winning probability of the bell is slightly higher than in the normal gaming state, so in SB, the expected payout value per game is higher and the payout rate of medals per game is higher than in the normal gaming state. It will be advantageous to the player, but the difference is slight.

  In addition, the substantial payout expected value in SB is less than 3, whereas the payout number to be paid out when any cherry wins as described above is 15 so that the normal gaming state and SB When any one of SBs (1) to (3) is won at the same time as one of the cherries, more medals can be obtained by winning the selected cherry.

  In this embodiment, when either CB or BB (1) is won in the normal gaming state, the lottery probability of the small role is the same as in the normal gaming state, but the combination of replay (1) and replay (2) The replay time (8) (RT (8)) is controlled so that the probability is higher than the normal gaming state. RT (8) ends when the winning special combination wins.

  Since the payout rate of medals per game in RT (8) exceeds 1, an increase in medals can be expected, but black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries cannot simultaneously aim for the symbols that make up these roles. The substantial appearance rate is 1/3, and considering this, the actual payout rate of medals per game in RT (8) is less than 1, and the medals decrease.

  When either CB or BB (1) wins, the sub CPU 91a of this embodiment notifies the type of the selected BB and controls the assist time to execute the cherry type notification for notifying the type of cherry. A game number distribution lottery is performed in which the number of games to be selected is selected from a plurality of different predetermined game numbers.

  Then, the sub CPU 91a sets the number of games selected in the game number distribution lottery in the RAM 91c, and controls the assist time until the number of games is consumed, during which any of black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry is selected. When Kaga wins, a cherry type notification for notifying the type is executed.

  As with the fall type combination notification in Example 1, the cherry type notification is a color or pattern (black cherry) indicating that the black cherry has been won, the net cherry has been won, or the white cherry has been won. Black to indicate that it has won, shaded to indicate that net cherry has been won, and white to indicate that white cherry has been won) It is only necessary to inform the player of the type of cherries that have been won, suggesting the types of cherries that have been selected, the combination of the cherries themselves, the combination of symbols, and the types of cherries. A notification may be made by displaying an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51, or a notification may be made by turning on a corresponding LED, outputting a corresponding sound, or the like. Furthermore, a symbol that is an index of a symbol that differs depending on the type of cherry (such as a symbol that is located near the symbol of the cherry and that stands out from the symbol of the cherry), an image that suggests the symbol, etc. Anyway.

  In addition, in particular, when the winning cherry pull-in is restricted by the type of the winning BB, in addition to the cherry type notification, an operation procedure for avoiding the constituent symbols of the special role won in the middle reel or the right reel (for example, If CB is won, the procedure is to stop first with black 7 on the right reel, and if BB (1) has been won, aim first with net 7 on the right reel. The procedure for performing the stop operation), that is, the procedure for preventing the winning of the winning cherry from being restricted.

  In this embodiment, the number of games is applied as the assist time end condition. However, the assist time end condition can be selected in various ways. For example, the winning of the winning special role, the number of games and the cherry type Number of notifications to be executed, number of cherry wins to reach a specified number, winning or winning a specific role, winning or winning a specific role to reach a specified number, winning a final lottery, etc. Is applicable. Further, the end condition may be changed during the assist time. Further, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to end the assist time for each prescribed number of games, and the lottery is won by winning the lottery.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the “black cherry” symbol, “net cherry” symbol, and “white cherry” symbol of the left reel constituting black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry are intentionally stopped on the winning line. Since black cherries, net cherries and white cherries are won, it is impossible to deliberately win these black cherries, net cherries and white cherries. Although it is possible to win with a probability of 1/3, it will be missed with a probability of 2/3.

  On the other hand, in the assist time, when any of black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry is won, the cherry type notification is executed, so that the player is notified of the black cherry, It is possible to recognize which type of cherry is selected from among net cherry and white cherry, and the black reel, black cherry, net cherry, It is possible to specify the stop operation position where the “white cherry” symbol stops on the winning line, and it is possible to win all the winning cherries.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the actual payout rate of medals per game in RT (8) is less than 1 and the number of medals will decrease, but it was won by being controlled by the assist time. Since black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries can all be won, the payout rate of medals per game in this case exceeds 1.

  For this reason, when CB or BB (1) is elected and controlled to RT (8), the medal will increase while the assist time is controlled. It is possible to acquire more medals by continuing the RT (8). On the other hand, after the assist time is over, medals will decrease and no special lottery will be drawn, so it is better for the player to finish the RT (8) by winning the winning special role It will be advantageous.

  As described above, in the slot machine of this embodiment, when either CB or BB (1) is won, it is controlled to RT (8) until the winning special combination wins, and during RT (8) An increase in medals can be expected on the condition that the winning black cherries, net cherries and white cherries are all awarded. That is, when either CB or BB (1) is elected, it is controlled to RT (8) advantageous to the player, and RT (8) does not continue from BB or CB, but RT ( 8) From BB or BB, a gaming state advantageous to the player continues, so that the player's expectation can be increased step by step before being controlled by BB or CB.

  RT (8) can be expected to increase the number of medals on the condition that all the black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries won as described above. However, the winning black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries are expected. In order to win all the cherries, the left reel must be stopped at the timing of the “cherry” symbol pull-in range according to the color or pattern of the selected cherries. The black reel, black cherry, and white cherry symbols that make up the white cherry cannot be intentionally stopped on the winning line, so if you don't know the type of the winning cherry The winning cherries cannot be won reliably, and an increase in medals cannot be expected just by moving to RT (8).

  For this reason, in this embodiment, when CB or BB (1) is won, not only the transition to RT (8) is performed, but a lottery for lottery of the number of games is performed and any cherry is selected during the number of won games. Is selected, the cherry type notification that indicates the type of the selected cherry is controlled at the assist time, so the stop operation is performed with the color or pattern cherry notified by the cherry type notification targeting the left reel. All winning cherries will be awarded. However, even though the type of cherry won by assist time will be informed, an increase in medals is not expected if the stop operation cannot be performed accordingly, and the player will be the first to perform technical intervention for the player. Since an advantageous gaming state can be achieved, the interest of the game can be improved.

  RT (8) continues after either CB or BB (1) wins until the winning special role wins, but the cherry type notification is executed only during the assist time. After the assist time is over, the cherry type notification is not executed even at RT (8), and the technical intervention of the player is virtually impossible, so an increase in medals cannot be expected. After the assist time is over, it is possible to prompt the player to win the special combination that has been elected promptly.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry are won in the normal gaming state and SB, that is, when any cherry that cannot be surely won even if won is won, SBs that transfer only one game to SBs that have a higher medal payout rate than in the normal gaming state win simultaneously, so even if one of the cherries wins, it is not possible to win and no medals can be won. Can win the game and gain profits from the SB, so it is possible to reduce the player's loss caused by the missed cherry.

  In addition, although the payout rate of medals is higher than that in the normal gaming state in SB, the expected payout value is smaller than the number of medals obtained by winning cherries, so one of the cherries wins and the cherry If the player guesses the type of the game and wins the cherry as a result, he can win more medals than if he misses the cherry and wins the SB. The interest of the player can be further enhanced.

  In this embodiment, in the normal game state and SB, any cherry and any SB are always won at the same time, and any cherry or any SB is not won alone. In addition to the case where one of the cherries and one of the SBs are always won simultaneously, either one of the cherries or one of the SBs may be won alone.

  Also, in this embodiment, when any cherry and any SB are elected at the same time, and a stop operation is performed at a timing at which both of the winning cherries and the winning SBs can be drawn. In addition, the SB configuration symbol is controlled to be drawn in preference to the cherry configuration symbol, and any special role is won and carried over, that is, during RT (8), the SB is an internal lottery. It becomes out of object. For this reason, when any cherry is won in the normal gaming state, the winning of the cherry won in the normal gaming state, that is, the medal payout rate is reduced by restricting the winning of the winning cherry by the winning SB at the same time. The medal payout rate in RT (8), which is reduced and does not limit the pull-in of the cherry won by SB, can be relatively increased. On the other hand, in RT (8), it is possible to win the winning cherry without performing the stop operation in the troublesome operation procedure of daringly avoiding SB.

  As described above, the third embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the third embodiment, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as in the first or second embodiment has the same effect as that described in the first or second embodiment. Further, the modified example illustrated for the first embodiment or the second embodiment can also be applied to the third embodiment.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is an internal structure figure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is the schematic which shows the wiring connection state of the game control board and the electronic component for games connected to this game control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of an external output board | substrate. (A) is a timing chart showing the output status of the medal IN signal, and (b) is a timing chart showing the output status of the medal OUT signal. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel motor. (A) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of starting of a reel motor, (b) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of rotation of a reel motor and a stop. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a figure which shows the structure of the combination used as the object of an internal lottery. (A) is a figure which shows the winning probability of the combination of a combination or combination including watermelon, watermelon + 1 piece, (b) is the magnitude relationship of the winning probability of the combination of a combination of watermelon, watermelon + 1 piece or combination FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the selection rate of continuous production A and B, (b) is a figure which shows the character selection rate in continuous production A. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the bonus production performed when BB (2) or BB (3) wins.

Explanation of symbols

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 32L, 32C, 32R Reel motor 34 Hopper unit 35 Overflow tank 35a Full tank sensor 41 Main controller 41a CPU
41b ROM
41c RAM
91 Sub-control unit 91a CPU
91b ROM
91c RAM

Claims (5)

The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and the display result is displayed on a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable. A slot machine in which one game is ended by being derived and displayed, and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived and displayed on the variable display device,
Pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow the occurrence of winnings before the display result of the variable display device is derived;
Derivation operation means operated when deriving the display result of the variable display device;
Derivation control means for performing control to cause the variable display device to derive a display result when the derivation operation means is operated;
Regardless of the determination result of the prior determination means, special game state control means for controlling to a special game state that is advantageous for the player by always allowing the occurrence of a small prize winning accompanied by the provision of the gaming value. ,
Game value number counting means for counting the total number of special grants that is the total number of game values given to the player after the start of the special game state;
Special gaming state ending means for ending the special gaming state when the total number of special grants exceeds a prescribed value M (where M is an integer of 1 or more) in the special gaming state;
With
In the special gaming state, the game can be started by setting the number of bets using the gaming value a (where a is an integer equal to or greater than 1), and the gaming value b (where, b is an integer less than or equal to 1 and smaller than M). First type of small role winning and gaming value c (where c is an integer smaller than M and greater than or equal to 1 unlike b) A second type of small role winning with a grant of
The special gaming state according to the combination of the number of occurrences of the first type of small part winning and the number of occurrences of the second type of small part winning when the total number of special grants exceeds the specified value M The specified value M and the game value are set so that a net increase that is a difference between the total number of special grants at the end of the game and the total number of game values used for setting the number of bets in the special game state is different. Values a, b, and c are set,
The pre-determining means determines whether or not to allow a special prize different from the small prize winning in the special gaming state,
The derivation control means includes
When it is not determined to allow the occurrence of the special prize in the special gaming state, the prize display result corresponding to the first type of small part prize is displayed regardless of the operation procedure of the derivation operation means. A control that can be derived to the variable display device and that does not cause the variable display device to derive a winning display result corresponding to the second type of small prize winning,
When it is determined to allow the occurrence of the special prize in the special gaming state, when the operation of the derivation operation means is performed in the first operation procedure, the first type of small part prize is awarded. When the variable display device performs control for deriving the corresponding winning display result, and when the operation of the deriving operation means is performed in a second operation procedure different from the first operation procedure, A slot machine, characterized in that control is performed to cause the variable display device to derive a winning display result corresponding to a small role winning. The prescribed value M and the gaming values a, b, and c are set so that the net increase is maximized on condition that the number of occurrences of the second type of small part winning is not zero. The slot machine according to claim 1. The prescribed value M and the game values a, b, and c are set so that the net increase is maximized on condition that the number of occurrences of the second type of small part winning is zero. The slot machine according to claim 1. In the special gaming state, when the pre-determining means determines that the occurrence of the special prize is allowed, the special winning notification means for notifying that the occurrence of the special prize is decided is provided,
The special prize informing means determines that the special prize is allowed to occur at a higher rate in the special gaming state in which a specific informing condition is satisfied than in the special gaming state in which the specific informing condition is not established. The slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the slot machine is notified. A game control board equipped with game control means for controlling the game;
A gaming electronic component including at least one of a first electronic component that outputs a signal related to the progress of the game and a second electronic component that receives a signal related to the progress of the game;
Wiring for electrically connecting the gaming electronic component and the game control board provided between the gaming electronic component and the gaming control board so as to be detachable by connection between connectors;
A relay board that is connected between the wiring and the connector and relays input / output of signals between the gaming electronic component and the gaming control board,
A connection release restriction state in which the connection between the connectors on the wiring between the gaming electronic component and the game control board cannot be released unless the release restriction part related to the connection between the connectors is destroyed. Electronic component connection release regulating means to be formed;
With
The electronic component connection release regulating means is
A first electronic component connection release restricting means for disabling connection between the connectors of the wiring between the game control board and the relay board;
Second electronic component connection release restricting means for disabling connection between the connectors of the wiring between the relay board and the gaming electronic component;
The slot machine according to claim 1, comprising:

Images